Nikon | D5300 | Nikon D5300 Reference Manual (complete instructions)

Nikon D5300 Reference Manual (complete instructions)
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
En
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR) digital camera. To get
the most from your camera, please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and
keep them where they will be read by all who use the product.
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
i The Table of Contents ............ 0 i
i Error Messages........................ 0 256
i Troubleshooting..................... 0 251
i The Index ................................. 0 283
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols and conventions are
used:
D
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before use to
prevent damage to the camera.
A
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before using the
camera.
0
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are shown in bold.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
Help
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other topics. See page 8
for details.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions in “For Your Safety”
(0 viii–xiv).
Table of Contents
For Your Safety ........................................................................................................................viii
Notices.......................................................................................................................................... xi
Location Data ............................................................................................................................ xv
Wireless ......................................................................................................................................xvi
Introduction
1
Getting to Know the Camera................................................................................................. 1
The Camera Body...................................................................................................................... 1
The Mode Dial ............................................................................................................................ 3
The Viewfinder........................................................................................................................... 4
The Monitor ................................................................................................................................ 5
The Information Display ......................................................................................................... 6
Camera Menus: An Overview ................................................................................................ 8
First Steps ...................................................................................................................................11
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
19
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder.....................................................................................20
Viewing Photographs............................................................................................................22
Deleting Unwanted Pictures...............................................................................................22
Framing Photos in the Monitor ..........................................................................................24
Viewing Photographs............................................................................................................26
Deleting Unwanted Pictures...............................................................................................26
Recording Movies ....................................................................................................................27
Viewing Movies........................................................................................................................28
Deleting Unwanted Movies ................................................................................................29
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
30
The Mode Dial ..........................................................................................................................31
k Portrait...............................................................................................................................31
l Landscape........................................................................................................................31
p Child...................................................................................................................................31
m Sports.................................................................................................................................32
n Close up ............................................................................................................................32
Other Scenes.............................................................................................................................33
o Night Portrait ..................................................................................................................33
r Night Landscape............................................................................................................33
s Party/Indoor ....................................................................................................................34
t Beach/Snow ....................................................................................................................34
u Sunset................................................................................................................................34
v Dusk/Dawn ......................................................................................................................35
i
w Pet Portrait ...................................................................................................................... 35
x Candlelight ....................................................................................................................... 35
y Blossom ............................................................................................................................ 36
z Autumn Colors ............................................................................................................... 36
0 Food.................................................................................................................................... 36
Special Effects
37
% Night Vision..................................................................................................................... 37
g Color Sketch ................................................................................................................... 38
' Toy Camera Effect ......................................................................................................... 38
( Miniature Effect ............................................................................................................. 38
3 Selective Color ............................................................................................................... 39
1 Silhouette ........................................................................................................................ 39
2 High Key ........................................................................................................................... 39
3 Low Key ............................................................................................................................ 40
) HDR Painting................................................................................................................... 40
Options Available in Live View .......................................................................................... 41
More on Photography
45
Choosing a Release Mode ....................................................................................................45
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode) ..................................................................................46
Quiet Shutter Release ............................................................................................................48
Self-Timer Mode.......................................................................................................................49
Focus (Viewfinder Photography) .......................................................................................51
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode ..................................................... 51
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected: AF-Area Mode.................................... 53
Focus Point Selection............................................................................................................ 55
Focus Lock................................................................................................................................. 55
Manual Focus........................................................................................................................... 57
Image Quality and Size..........................................................................................................59
Image Quality........................................................................................................................... 59
Image Size ................................................................................................................................. 61
Using the Built-in Flash..........................................................................................................62
Auto Pop-up Modes .............................................................................................................. 62
Manual Pop-up Modes ......................................................................................................... 64
ISO Sensitivity ...........................................................................................................................67
Interval Timer Photography.................................................................................................68
Remote Control Photography ............................................................................................70
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control .................................................................... 70
Restoring Default Settings ...................................................................................................72
ii
Location Data ............................................................................................................................74
Embedding Location Data in Photos and Movies.......................................................74
Track Logs..................................................................................................................................76
Deleting Logs ...........................................................................................................................78
GPS Options ..............................................................................................................................79
P, S, A, and M Modes
82
Shutter Speed and Aperture................................................................................................82
Mode P (Programmed Auto) ..............................................................................................84
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto) ..........................................................................................85
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto).......................................................................................86
Mode M (Manual)....................................................................................................................87
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) .............................................................................88
Exposure .....................................................................................................................................90
Metering.....................................................................................................................................90
Autoexposure Lock ................................................................................................................91
Exposure Compensation......................................................................................................92
Flash Compensation ..............................................................................................................93
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows ...............................................................94
Active D-Lighting....................................................................................................................94
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ................................................................................................96
Multiple Exposure....................................................................................................................98
White Balance ........................................................................................................................ 101
Fine-Tuning White Balance .............................................................................................. 103
Preset Manual........................................................................................................................ 104
Bracketing ............................................................................................................................... 108
Picture Controls..................................................................................................................... 111
Selecting a Picture Control............................................................................................... 111
Modifying Picture Controls .............................................................................................. 112
Creating Custom Picture Controls ................................................................................. 115
Sharing Custom Picture Controls................................................................................... 117
Live View
118
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ........................................................................... 118
Focusing in Live View ......................................................................................................... 119
The Live View Display......................................................................................................... 122
Recording and Viewing Movies
126
Recording Movies ................................................................................................................. 126
Movie Settings ...................................................................................................................... 128
Viewing Movies ..................................................................................................................... 130
iii
Editing Movies ....................................................................................................................... 131
Trimming Movies..................................................................................................................131
Saving Selected Frames .....................................................................................................134
Playback and Deletion
135
Full-Frame Playback............................................................................................................. 135
Photo Information................................................................................................................136
Thumbnail Playback ............................................................................................................ 140
Calendar Playback ................................................................................................................ 141
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................................................... 142
Protecting Photographs from Deletion........................................................................ 143
Rating Pictures....................................................................................................................... 144
Rating Individual Pictures..................................................................................................144
Rating Multiple Pictures.....................................................................................................145
Deleting Photographs ........................................................................................................ 146
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback........................................................146
The Playback Menu..............................................................................................................147
Slide Shows............................................................................................................................. 149
Slide Show Options..............................................................................................................150
Connections
151
Installing ViewNX 2 .............................................................................................................. 151
Using ViewNX 2 ..................................................................................................................... 153
Copy Pictures to the Computer.......................................................................................153
View Pictures..........................................................................................................................154
Printing Photographs.......................................................................................................... 156
Connecting the Printer.......................................................................................................156
Printing Pictures One at a Time.......................................................................................157
Printing Multiple Pictures..................................................................................................159
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set .........................................................................162
Viewing Pictures on TV ....................................................................................................... 164
Standard Definition Devices.............................................................................................164
High-Definition Devices .....................................................................................................165
Wi-Fi
167
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You................................................................................................ 167
Accessing the Camera......................................................................................................... 168
WPS (Android Only) .............................................................................................................169
PIN Entry (Android Only)....................................................................................................170
SSID (Android and iOS).......................................................................................................171
iv
Selecting Pictures for Upload........................................................................................... 173
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload ..................................................................... 173
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload ........................................................................ 174
Camera Menus
175
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ........................................................................... 175
Playback Folder................................................................................................................ 175
Playback Display Options............................................................................................. 176
Image Review ................................................................................................................... 176
Rotate Tall .......................................................................................................................... 176
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ............................................................................ 177
Reset Shooting Menu .................................................................................................... 177
Storage Folder .................................................................................................................. 178
NEF (RAW) Recording..................................................................................................... 178
Auto Distortion Control ................................................................................................ 179
Color Space........................................................................................................................ 179
Long Exposure NR........................................................................................................... 179
High ISO NR ....................................................................................................................... 180
ISO Sensitivity Settings.................................................................................................. 180
Optical VR........................................................................................................................... 181
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings................................................................... 182
Reset Custom Settings................................................................................................... 183
a: Autofocus ........................................................................................................................... 184
a1: AF-C Priority Selection ............................................................................................ 184
a2: Number of Focus Points......................................................................................... 184
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator................................................................................. 185
a4: Rangefinder ................................................................................................................ 185
b: Exposure............................................................................................................................. 186
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl .................................................................................. 186
c: Timers/AE Lock ................................................................................................................. 186
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L ................................................................................ 186
c2: Auto off Timers .......................................................................................................... 186
c3: Self-Timer..................................................................................................................... 187
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)................................................................................ 187
d: Shooting/Display............................................................................................................. 187
d1: Beep .............................................................................................................................. 187
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ......................................................................................... 188
d3: ISO Display.................................................................................................................. 188
d4: File Number Sequence........................................................................................... 188
d5: Exposure Delay Mode............................................................................................. 189
d6: Print Date .................................................................................................................... 190
e: Bracketing/Flash .............................................................................................................. 192
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash.................................................................................. 192
e2: Auto Bracketing Set................................................................................................. 192
v
f: Controls ................................................................................................................................193
f1: Assign Fn Button ........................................................................................................193
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button .........................................................................................194
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation................................................................................................194
f4: Slot Empty Release Lock..........................................................................................194
f5: Reverse Indicators......................................................................................................194
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup .......................................................................................... 195
Format Memory Card .....................................................................................................196
Monitor Brightness..........................................................................................................196
Info Display Format .........................................................................................................197
Auto Info Display..............................................................................................................199
Image Dust Off Ref Photo .............................................................................................199
Flicker Reduction..............................................................................................................200
Time Zone and Date .......................................................................................................201
Language ............................................................................................................................201
Auto Image Rotation ......................................................................................................202
Image Comment ..............................................................................................................202
Video Mode........................................................................................................................202
Remote Control ................................................................................................................203
Eye-Fi Upload ....................................................................................................................204
Conformity Marking........................................................................................................204
Firmware Version .............................................................................................................204
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ................................................................. 205
Creating Retouched Copies..............................................................................................206
D-Lighting...........................................................................................................................207
Red-Eye Correction..........................................................................................................207
Trim .......................................................................................................................................208
Monochrome.....................................................................................................................208
Filter Effects........................................................................................................................209
Color Balance.....................................................................................................................210
Image Overlay ...................................................................................................................211
NEF (RAW) Processing ....................................................................................................213
Resize....................................................................................................................................214
Quick Retouch...................................................................................................................215
Straighten ...........................................................................................................................215
Distortion Control............................................................................................................215
Fisheye .................................................................................................................................216
Color Outline .....................................................................................................................216
Color Sketch.......................................................................................................................216
Perspective Control.........................................................................................................217
Miniature Effect ................................................................................................................218
Selective Color ..................................................................................................................219
Side-by-side Comparison..............................................................................................221
m Recent Settings/O My Menu....................................................................................... 222
Choosing a Menu..................................................................................................................222
m Recent Settings ................................................................................................................222
O My Menu.............................................................................................................................223
vi
Technical Notes
226
Compatible Lenses............................................................................................................... 226
Compatible CPU Lenses .................................................................................................... 226
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses .......................................................................................... 228
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)................................................................................. 232
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting System (CLS)...................... 232
Other Accessories ................................................................................................................. 236
Approved Memory Cards.................................................................................................. 238
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter ........................................................ 239
Caring for the Camera......................................................................................................... 240
Storage..................................................................................................................................... 240
Cleaning .................................................................................................................................. 240
Image Sensor Cleaning ...................................................................................................... 241
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions............................................................. 245
Caring for the Camera ........................................................................................................ 245
Caring for the Battery ......................................................................................................... 246
Available Settings ................................................................................................................. 248
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 251
Battery/Display ..................................................................................................................... 251
Shooting (All Modes) .......................................................................................................... 251
Shooting (P, S, A, M)........................................................................................................... 253
Playback .................................................................................................................................. 253
Location Data ........................................................................................................................ 255
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks) ................................................................................................. 255
Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................ 255
Error Messages....................................................................................................................... 256
Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 259
Lens Kits ................................................................................................................................... 266
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR and
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G.................................................................... 266
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II............................................................... 271
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR ......................................................... 275
Memory Card Capacity ....................................................................................................... 281
Battery Life .............................................................................................................................. 282
Index.......................................................................................................................................... 283
vii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others, read the following
safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment. Keep these safety instructions
where all those who use the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this
section are indicated by the following symbol:
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all warnings before using
A this
Nikon product.
❚❚ WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame when
shooting backlit subjects. Sunlight
focused into the camera when the sun is
in or close to the frame could cause a fire.
A Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong light
source through the viewfinder could
cause permanent visual impairment.
A Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control
When operating the viewfinder diopter
adjustment control with your eye to the
viewfinder, care should be taken not to
put your finger in your eye accidentally.
A Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an unusual
smell coming from the equipment or AC
adapter (available separately), unplug
the AC adapter and remove the battery
immediately, taking care to avoid burns.
Continued operation could result in
injury. After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
A Do not use in the presence of flammable gas
Do not use electronic equipment in the
presence of flammable gas, as this could
result in explosion or fire.
viii
A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in injury. In addition, note that
small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this
equipment, consult a physician
immediately.
A Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal parts
could result in injury. In the event of
malfunction, the product should be
repaired only by a qualified technician.
Should the product break open as the
result of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter and then
take the product to a Nikon-authorized
service center for inspection.
A Do not place the strap around the neck of an
infant or child
Placing the camera strap around the neck
of an infant or child could result in
strangulation.
A Do not remain in contact with the camera,
battery, or charger for extended periods while
the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot. Leaving
the device in direct contact with the skin
for extended periods may result in lowtemperature burns.
A Do not leave the product where it will be exposed
to extremely high temperatures, such as in an
enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight
Failure to observe this precaution could
cause damage or fire.
A Do not aim a flash at the operator of a motor
vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in accidents.
A Observe caution when using the flash
• Using the camera with the flash in close
contact with the skin or other objects
could cause burns.
• Using the flash close to the subject’s
eyes could cause temporary visual
impairment. The flash should be no less
than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from the
subject. Particular care should be
observed when photographing infants.
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care should be
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or entering
the eyes or mouth.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or to
excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage when
fully discharged. To avoid damage to
the product, be sure to remove the
battery when no charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use, attach
the terminal cover and store in a cool,
dry place.
• The battery may be hot immediately
after use or when the product has been
used on battery power for an extended
period. Before removing the battery
turn the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately should
you notice any changes in the battery,
such as discoloration or deformation.
A Do not carry tripods with a lens or camera
attached
You could trip or accidentally strike
others, resulting in injury.
A Observe proper precautions when handling
batteries
Batteries may leak, overheat, rupture, or
catch fire if improperly handled. Observe
the following precautions when handling
batteries for use in this product:
• Use only batteries approved for use in
this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the battery.
• Do not expose the battery or the
camera in which it is inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are using
an AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the battery
upside down or backwards.
ix
A Observe proper precautions when handling the
charger
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or electric
shock.
• Do not short the charger terminals.
Failure to observe this precaution could
result in overheating and damage to
the charger.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of the
plug should be removed with a dry
cloth. Continued use could result in fire.
• Do not go near the charger during
thunderstorms. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in electric
shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger with
wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in electric shock.
• Do not use with travel converters or
adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC
inverters. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the product
or cause overheating or fire.
A Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the input and
output jacks, use only the cables
provided or sold by Nikon for the
purpose to maintain compliance with
product regulations.
x
A CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or
manuals should not be played back on
audio CD equipment. Playing CD-ROMs
on an audio CD player could cause
hearing loss or damage the equipment.
A Follow the directions of airline and hospital
personnel
Remove Eye-Fi cards, disable Wi-Fi, and
select Off for Location data > Record
location data before boarding an
aircraft, and turn the product off during
takeoff and landing or when so directed
by airline or hospital staff. Radio waves
emitted by the device could interfere
with aircraft navigation or hospital
medical equipment.
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this
product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or
translated into any language in any form,
by any means, without Nikon’s prior
written permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
appearance and specifications of the
hardware and software described in these
manuals at any time and without prior
notice.
• Nikon will not be held liable for any
damages resulting from the use of this
product.
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring any
errors or omissions to the attention of the
Nikon representative in your area (address
provided separately).
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED
BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
electrical and electronic
equipment is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
• This product is designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
• Separate collection and recycling helps
conserve natural resources and prevent
negative consequences for human health
and the environment that might result
from incorrect disposal.
• For more information, contact the retailer
or the local authorities in charge of waste
management.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is to be
collected separately.
The following apply only to users in
European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
symbol or not, are designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
• For more information, contact the retailer
or the local authorities in charge of waste
management.
xi
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY
FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper
configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is intended to be correctly
oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
D5300
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
CAUTIONS
interference in a residential installation. This
Modifications
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
The FCC requires the user to be notified that
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
any changes or modifications made to this
and used in accordance with the instructions,
device that are not expressly approved by
may cause harmful interference to radio
Nikon Corporation may void the user’s
communications. However, there is no
authority to operate the equipment.
guarantee that interference will not occur in
Interface Cables
a particular installation. If this equipment
Use the interface cables sold or provided by
does cause harmful interference to radio or
Nikon for your equipment. Using other
television reception, which can be
interface cables may exceed the limits of
determined by turning the equipment off
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
and on, the user is encouraged to try to
correct the interference by one or more of
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
the following measures:
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
xii
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced
by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,
coins, securities, government bonds, or
local government bonds, even if such
copies or reproductions are stamped
“Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused postage
stamps or post cards issued by the
government is prohibited.
The copying or reproduction of stamps
issued by the government and of certified
documents stipulated by law is prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions on
copies or reproductions of securities issued
by private companies (shares, bills, checks,
gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or
coupon tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do not
copy or reproduce passports issued by the
government, licenses issued by public
agencies and private groups, ID cards, and
tickets, such as passes and meal coupons.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
copyrighted creative works such as books,
music, paintings, woodcuts, prints, maps,
drawings, movies, and photographs is
governed by national and international
copyright laws. Do not use this product for
the purpose of making illegal copies or to
infringe copyright laws.
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices
does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered
from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in
the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, select Off
for Location data > Record location data (0 74) in the setup menu and, erase all data using
commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images
containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace
any pictures selected for preset manual (0 104). To delete track log data on a memory card,
select Location data > Log list and delete all logs as described on page 78. Wi-Fi settings can
be reset to default values by selecting Wi-Fi > Network settings > Reset network settings in
the setup menu. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage
devices.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com
xiii
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry.
Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash
accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are
engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this
electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may
void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not
bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal
operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
D
Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital
camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety
requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR
NIKON WARRANTY.
A
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the
camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon
will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A
Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to
frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography.
Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the
following URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xiv
Location Data
Track logs: Location data will be recorded with pictures taken while On is selected for Location
data > Record location data (0 74). In addition, if Start is selected for Location data >
Create log > Log location data in the setup menu (0 76), the camera continues to log
location data even while off. Radio waves produced by the device may affect medical
equipment and aircraft navigation systems; in situations in which the use of satellite
navigation devices is restricted or prohibited, such as in hospitals or aircraft, be sure to select
Off for Record location data and turn the camera off.
Sharing location data: Note that addresses and other personal information may be inferred from
the location data stored in track logs or embedded in images. Exercise caution when sharing
images and track logs or when posting them to the Internet or other locations where they can
be viewed by third parties. See “Disposing of Data Storage Devices” (0 xiii) for information on
erasing location data before disposing of the camera or memory cards.
Navigation: The position, altitude, and other location data reported by the device are
approximations only and are not intended for surveying or navigation. Be sure to take
appropriate maps or other navigational devices with you when using the product during such
outdoor activities as mountain climbing or hiking.
Restrictions on use: The location data function may not perform as expected in some countries or
regions, including (as of November, 2013) China and in the vicinity of the Chinese border. Some
countries, including China, prohibit unauthorized use of satellite navigation and other location
data devices; before travelling, check with your travel agent or the embassy or tourism board
of the countries you will be visiting. Where use is prohibited, select Off for Record location
data.
xv
Wireless
This product, which contains encryption software developed in the United States, is controlled
by the United States Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or reexported to any country to which the United States embargoes goods. The following
countries are currently subject to embargo: Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, and Syria.
Notices for Customers in the U. S. A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device
that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xvi
Notices for Customers in Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with
using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless
devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency
energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce
health effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating
effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have
not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects
might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The D5300,
which is equipped with a LBWA1U5YR1 (FCC ID: VPYLBYR650/IC ID: 772C-LBYR650) wireless
LAN module, has been tested and found to comply with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set
forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
rules. Please refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.
xvii
Notices for Customers in Europe
Hereby, Nikon, declares that the D5300 is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration
of conformity may be consulted at
http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D5300.pdf
Notice for Customers in Singapore
Trade Name:
Model: D5300
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of certification labels not
affixed to the device is given below.
Complies with
IMDA Standards
DA104328
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely connect for the
wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the following may occur if security is not
enabled:
• Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to steal user IDs,
passwords, and other personal information.
• Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network and alter data or
perform other malicious actions. Note that due the design of wireless networks, specialized
attacks may allow unauthorized access even when security is enabled.
xviii
Introduction
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays. You
may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the
rest of the manual.
The Camera Body
3 2 1
13
24
4
5
6
7
8
11
25
14
15
4
16
9
17
10
18
19
20
12
22
23
1 Mode dial...................................3
2 Live view switch
Live view .....................24, 118
Movie...........................27, 126
3 R (information) button...6, 123
4 Eyelets for camera strap.......11
5 E/N button
Exposure compensation....92
Adjusting aperture ............87
Flash compensation..........93
6 Shutter-release button..........21
7 Power switch.............................2
8 Movie-record button ...28, 126
9 Infrared receiver for ML-L3
remote control (front) ....... 70
10 AF-assist illuminator ....52, 185
Self-timer lamp ......................49
Red-eye reduction lamp
......................................... 63, 65
11 Body cap
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
CPU contacts
Built-in flash............................ 62
Speaker ...................................... 2
Focal plane mark (E)........... 58
M/ Y button
Flash mode .................. 62, 64
Flash compensation ......... 93
Connector cover
Fn button
Using the Fn button........193
Mounting mark...................... 13
Lens release button .............. 18
s/E/# button ...................... 45
Continuous shooting ........46
Self-timer ............................ 49
Remote control.................. 70
Mirror......................................243
26
27
28
29
30
21
23 Lens mount ......................13, 58
24 Accessory shoe cover
25 Accessory shoe (for optional
flash units)......................... 232
26 Stereo microphone............. 128
27 Connector for external
microphone ....................... 129
28 USB and A/V connector
Connecting to a
computer....................... 153
Connecting to a printer
......................................... 156
Connecting to a TV......... 164
29 Accessory terminal ............. 237
30 HDMI mini-pin connector
............................................. 165
Introduction
1
7
1
8 9
10
2
11
12
3
4
13
14
15
16
5
17
21
20
18
19
6
P button
Changing settings in the
information display ......... 7
Rating pictures, retouching
photos, editing movies,
and selecting pictures for
upload to a smart
device..............................135
Restoring default
settings .............................72
A/L button
Using the A (L) button
...................................56, 194
Protecting photographs
from deletion ................143
Command dial
K button
Playback......................22, 135
12 Memory card slot
cover............................... 12, 17
13 J (OK) button ......................... 9
1 Viewfinder eyepiece.. 4, 16, 50 8
2 Rubber eyecup ...................... 50
3 G button
Menus ............................8, 175
Restoring default
settings ............................ 72
4 Infrared receiver for ML-L3
remote control (rear)..........70
5 Monitor
Viewing settings...................6
Live view .................... 24, 118 9
Full-frame playback
.................................. 22, 135
6 Tripod socket
7 Diopter adjustment
control .................................. 16 10
11
22
14 Multi selector ............................9
15 O button
Deleting pictures during
playback.................. 22, 146
16 Memory card access
lamp ............................ 21, 118
17 Power connector cover for
optional power
connector .......................... 239
18 Battery-chamber cover
latch ................................12, 17
19 Battery-chamber cover
..........................................12, 17
20 W/Q button
Thumbnails....................... 140
Playback zoom out ......... 142
Help.........................................8
21 X button
Playback zoom in ............ 142
22 Battery latch .....................12, 17
D
The Speaker
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices. Failure to observe this
precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices.
A
The Power Switch
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn
the camera on.
2
Introduction
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn
the camera off.
The Mode Dial
The camera offers a choice of the following shooting modes:
P, S, A, and M Modes
Select these modes for full control over
camera settings.
• P—Programmed auto (0 84)
• S—Shutter-priority auto (0 85)
• A—Aperture-priority auto (0 86)
• M—Manual (0 87)
Special Effects Modes
Use special effects during shooting.
• % Night vision (0 37)
• g Color sketch (0 38, 41)
• ' Toy camera effect (0 38, 42)
• ( Miniature effect (0 38, 42)
• 3 Selective color (0 39, 43)
• 1 Silhouette (0 39)
• 2 High key (0 39)
• 3 Low key (0 40)
• ) HDR painting (0 40)
Auto Modes
Select these modes for simple, point-andshoot photography.
• i Auto (0 19)
• j Auto (flash off) (0 19)
Scene Modes
The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the scene selected with the mode dial.
Match your selection to the scene being photographed.
• k Portrait (0 31)
• m Sports (0 32)
• l Landscape (0 31)
• n Close up (0 32)
• p Child (0 31)
• h Other scenes (0 33)
Introduction
3
The Viewfinder
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Framing grid (displayed when
On is selected for Custom
Setting d2) ........................ 188
2 Focus points ........................... 55
3 AF area brackets..............16, 20
4 Low battery warning............ 17
5 Monochrome indicator
(displayed in % mode or
when the Monochrome
Picture Control or a Picture
Control based on
Monochrome is
selected) ..................... 37, 111
6 “No memory card”
indicator............................... 12
7 Focus indicator ................21, 57
8 Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator............................... 91
9 Shutter speed ........................ 83
78
9
10
16
10 Aperture (f-number).............83
11 Special effects mode
indicator ...............................37
12 Bracketing indicator ...........108
13 Number of exposures
remaining ............................15
Number of shots remaining
before memory buffer
fills..........................................47
White balance recording
indicator .............................104
Exposure compensation
value......................................92
Flash compensation
value......................................93
ISO sensitivity ................67, 188
Capture mode indicator
14 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)............................15
11 12
17
18
19
13 14 15
20
15 Flash-ready indicator ........... 23
16 Flexible program
indicator............................... 84
17 Exposure indicator................ 87
Exposure compensation
display .................................. 92
Electronic rangefinder ....... 185
18 Flash compensation
indicator............................... 93
19 Exposure compensation
indicator............................... 92
20 Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator............................. 180
21 Warning indicator ............... 256
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
D
The Viewfinder
The response time and brightness of the viewfinder display may vary with temperature.
4
Introduction
21
The Monitor
The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.
180°
90°
180°
Normal use
Fold the monitor against the camera face out.
This position is recommended for normal
photography.
Low-angle shots
Frame live view shots with the camera close to
the ground.
High-angle shots
Frame live view shots while holding the camera
over your head.
Self-portraits
Use for self-portraits in live view. The monitor
shows a mirror image of what will appear in the
final picture.
D
Using the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently within the limits shown. Do not use force. Failure to observe these
precautions could damage the connection between the monitor and the camera body. To
protect the monitor when the camera is not in use, fold it back face down against the camera
body.
Introduction
5
The Information Display
Viewing settings: To view the information display, press the R
button.
R button
1
8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
2
19
3
4
5
6
7
20
21
22
24
1 Shooting mode
i auto/
j auto (flash off).............. 19
Scene modes...................... 30
Special effects mode........ 37
P, S, A, and M modes.......... 82
2 Aperture (f-number) ............ 83
Aperture display.................... 83
3 Shutter speed ........................ 83
Shutter-speed display.......... 83
4 Bracketing indicator........... 108
5 Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator............................... 91
6 Auto-area AF indicator ........ 53
3D-tracking indicator........... 53
Focus point ............................. 55
7 Release mode ........................ 45
8 Eye-Fi connection
indicator............................. 204
9 Wi-Fi connection
indicator............................. 172
10 Track log indicator ................ 77
23
11 Satellite signal indicator ......75
12 Exposure delay mode.........189
13 Multiple exposure
indicator .............................100
14 Print date indicator .............190
15 Vibration reduction indicator
.......................................18, 181
16 Flash control indicator........192
Flash compensation indicator
for optional flash units....235
17 “Beep” indicator...................187
18 Battery indicator....................17
19 ISO sensitivity .........................67
ISO sensitivity
display..........................67, 181
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator .............................180
20 ADL bracketing amount ....109
21 Number of exposures
remaining ............................ 15
White balance recording
indicator............................. 104
Capture mode indicator
22 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures) ........................... 15
23 Exposure indicator................ 87
Exposure compensation
indicator............................... 92
Bracketing progress
indicator............................. 110
24 Help icon ............................... 256
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
6
Introduction
Changing settings: To change the settings at the bottom of the
display, press the P button, then highlight items using the multi
selector and press J to view options for the highlighted item.
P button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Image quality..........................59 6 White balance ......................101 12 AF-area mode ................53, 120
Image size................................61 7 ISO sensitivity......................... 67 13 Focus mode....................51, 119
Auto bracketing .................. 109 8 Exposure compensation...... 92 14 Picture Control..................... 111
HDR (High Dynamic
9 Flash compensation ............. 93
Range) ...................................96 10 Flash mode ...................... 63, 65
5 Active D-Lighting...................94 11 Metering.................................. 90
1
2
3
4
A
Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or press the shutterrelease button halfway. The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for about 8 seconds (for information on choosing how long the monitor stays on,
see Auto off timers on page 186).
Introduction
7
Camera Menus: An Overview
Most shooting, playback, and setup options can
be accessed from the camera menus. To view the
menus, press the G button.
G button
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
D: Playback (0 175)
• C: Shooting (0 177)
• A: Custom Settings (0 182)
• B: Setup (0 195)
•
N: Retouch (0 205)
• m/O: Recent settings or My Menu (defaults
•
to Recent settings; 0 222)
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
d
A description of the currently selected option or menu
can be displayed by pressing the W (Q) button. Press 1
or 3 to scroll through the display. Press W (Q) again to
return to the menus.
W (Q) button
8
Introduction
❚❚ Using Camera Menus
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the camera menus.
Move cursor up
J button: select highlighted item
Cancel and return to
previous menu
Select highlighted item or
display sub-menu
Move cursor down
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1
Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the menus.
G button
2
Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current
menu.
3
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
Introduction
9
4
Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected
menu.
5
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
6
Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu
item.
7
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
8
Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To exit
without making a selection, press the G
button.
Note the following:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J, there are some
cases in which selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button
halfway (0 21).
10
Introduction
First Steps
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries or memory cards.
1
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet.
2
Charge the battery.
If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect the plug adapter
as shown below at left, making sure the plug is fully inserted. Insert the battery
and plug the charger in. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about an hour
and 50 minutes.
Battery charging
Charging complete
D
During Charging
Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this
precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is
complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to
begin charging again.
Introduction
11
3
Insert the battery and memory card.
Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep the
orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks the battery in place
when the battery is fully inserted.
Battery latch
16GB
Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.
The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data. When this switch is in the
“lock” position, the memory card can not be formatted and
photos can not be deleted or recorded (a beep will sound if
you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory
card, slide the switch to the “write” position.
D
B
16G
A
Write-protect switch
Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory cards
from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove memory
cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the power source
during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the
camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could damage
the card.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
12
Introduction
4
Attach a lens.
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens or body cap
is removed.
Remove the camera
body cap
Remove the rear
lens cap
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting marks
Mounting mark (lens)
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place.
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.
Introduction
13
5
Open the monitor.
Open the monitor as shown. Do not use force.
6
Turn the camera on.
A language-selection dialog will be displayed.
A
Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
Before using the camera, unlock and extend the
zoom ring. Keeping the retractable lens barrel
button pressed (q), rotate the zoom ring as
shown (w).
Retractable lens barrel
button
Pictures can not be taken when the lens is
retracted; if an error message is displayed as a
result of the camera having been turned on
with the lens retracted, rotate the zoom ring
until the message is no longer displayed.
14
Introduction
7
Choose a language and set the camera
clock.
Use the multi selector and J button to
select a language and set the camera clock.
q
J button: select
highlighted item
Select highlighted
item or display
sub-menu
Move cursor down
w
Select language
r
e
Select time zone
Select date format
t
Select daylight saving
time option
8
Move cursor up
Set time and date
(note that the camera
uses a 24-hour clock)
Check the battery level and number of exposures remaining.
Press the R button and check the battery level and
number of exposures remaining. In the case of exposures
remaining, values over 1000 are shown in thousands,
indicated by the letter “k”.
R button
Battery level (0 17)
Number of exposures
remaining
Introduction
15
9
Focus the viewfinder.
After removing the lens cap, rotate the diopter
adjustment control until the AF area brackets are
in sharp focus. When operating the control with
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put
your fingers or fingernails in your eye.
AF area brackets
Viewfinder not in focus
Viewfinder in focus
D
Charging the Battery
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages viii–x and 245–247 of this manual. Charge
the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the
battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F; failure to observe
this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C/32 °F to 15 °C/
59 °F and from 45 °C/113 °F to 60 °C/140 °F. The battery will not charge if its temperature is
below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F). If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight
times a second) during charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and
then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease
use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.
16
Introduction
A
Battery Level
Battery level is shown in the information display (if the battery is
low, a warning will also be displayed in the viewfinder). If the
information display does not appear when the R button is
pressed, the battery is exhausted and needs to be recharged.
Information display
L
K
Viewfinder
—
—
H
d
H
d
(flashes)
(flashes)
Description
Battery fully charged.
Battery partially discharged.
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare battery or
prepare to charge battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge battery.
A
Removing the Battery
To remove the battery, turn the camera off and open the batterychamber cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown by
the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by
hand.
A
Formatting Memory Cards
If this is the first time the memory card will be used in the camera or
if the card has been formatted in another device, select Format
memory card in the setup menu and follow the on-screen
instructions to format the card (0 196). Note that this permanently
deletes any data the card may contain. Be sure to copy any
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before
proceeding.
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the
camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and press the card
in to eject it (q). The card can then be removed by hand (w).
16GB
A
Introduction
17
A
A-M, M/A-M, and A/M-M Switches
When using autofocus with a lens equipped with an A-M mode
switch, slide the switch to A (if the lens has an M/A-M or A/M-M switch,
select M/A or A/M). For information on other lenses that can be used
with this camera, see page 226.
A
Vibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by selecting On for Optical VR in
the shooting menu (0 181), if the lens supports this option, or by
sliding the lens vibration reduction switch to ON, if the lens is
equipped with a vibration reduction switch. A vibration reduction
indicator appears in the information display when vibration
reduction is on.
A
Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging lenses. To
remove the lens, press and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing the lens, replace the
lens caps and camera body cap.
A
Retracting Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons
To retract the lens when the camera is not in use, hold the retractable
lens barrel button (q) and rotate the zoom ring to the “L” (lock)
position as shown (w). Retract the lens before removing it from the
camera, and be careful not to press the retractable lens barrel button
when attaching or removing the lens.
A
The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks. Check the clock
regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary.
A
The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power source, which is
charged as necessary when the main battery is installed. Three days of charging will power
the clock for about a month. If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed when
the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the
clock to the correct time and date.
18
Introduction
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes
(i and j)
This section describes how to shoot photographs and movies
in i and j modes, automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in
which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in
response to shooting conditions.
Before proceeding, turn the camera on and rotate the Mode dial
mode dial to i or j (the only difference between the
two is that the flash will not fire in j mode).
Viewfinder photography
Taking photographs
0 20
Viewing photographs
0 22
Deleting photographs
0 22
Taking photographs
0 24
Viewing photographs
0 26
Deleting photographs
0 26
Shooting movies
0 27
Viewing movies
0 28
Deleting movies
0 29
Live view
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
19
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder
1
Ready the camera.
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your
right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left.
When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation,
hold the camera as shown at right.
2
Frame the photograph.
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the
main subject in the AF area brackets.
AF area brackets
A
Using a Zoom Lens
Before focusing, rotate the zoom ring to adjust the focal
length and frame the photograph. Use the zoom ring to
zoom in on the subject so that it fills a larger area of the
frame, or zoom out to increase the area visible in the final
photograph (select longer focal lengths on the lens focal
length scale to zoom in, shorter focal lengths to zoom out).
Zoom in
Zoom ring
Zoom out
If the lens is equipped with a retractable lens barrel button
(0 14), press and hold the button while rotating the zoom
ring until the lens is released and the message shown at right
is no longer displayed, and then adjust zoom using the zoom
ring.
20
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
3
Press the shutter-release button halfway.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus
(if the subject is poorly lit, the flash may pop up
and the AF-assist illuminator may light). When
the focus operation is complete, a beep will
sound (a beep may not sound if the subject is
moving) and the active focus point and in-focus
indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder.
In-focus indicator
Description
I
Subject in focus.
Camera unable to focus using
I (flashes)
autofocus. See page 52.
4
Focus point
In-focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to take the photograph.
The memory card access lamp will light and the
photograph will be displayed in the monitor for a
few seconds. Do not eject the memory card or
remove or disconnect the power source until the
lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
Memory card access
lamp
A
The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. To take the photograph, press the shutter-release button
the rest of the way down.
Focus: press halfway
Shoot: press all the way down
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway also ends playback and readies the camera for
immediate use.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
21
Viewing Photographs
Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.
K button
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Display the photograph you wish to delete.
K button
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the picture.
22
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
A
The Standby Timer
The viewfinder and information display will turn off if no operations are performed for about
eight seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release button halfway to
reactivate the display. The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can
be selected using Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 186).
Exposure meters on
Exposure meters off
Exposure meters on
A
The Built-in Flash
If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in i mode,
the built-in flash will pop up automatically when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway (0 62). If the flash is raised,
photographs can only be taken when the flash-ready indicator (M)
is displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not displayed, the flash
is charging; remove your finger briefly from the shutter-release
button and try again.
When the flash is not in use, return it to its closed position by
pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
23
Framing Photos in the Monitor
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor (live view).
Live view switch
2
Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand
and cradle the camera body or lens
with your left.
When framing photographs in portrait (tall) orientation,
hold the camera as shown at right.
3
Focus.
Press the shutter-release button halfway. The
focus point will flash green while the camera
focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus
point will be displayed in green; if the camera is
unable to focus, the focus point will flash red.
24
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Focus point
4
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down. The monitor turns off and the
memory card access lamp lights during
recording. Do not eject the memory card or remove
or disconnect the power source until the lamp has
gone out and recording is complete. When
recording is complete, the photograph will be
displayed in the monitor for a few seconds.
Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.
Memory card access lamp
A
Automatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)
If live view is selected in i or j mode, the camera will automatically
analyze the subject and select the appropriate shooting mode when
autofocus is enabled. The selected mode is shown in the monitor.
c
d
e
f
Z
b
Portrait
Landscape
Close up
Night portrait
Auto
Auto (flash off)
Human portrait subjects
Landscapes and cityscapes
Subjects close to the camera
Portrait subjects framed against a dark background
Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not fall into the categories
listed above
A
Live View
For more information on taking photographs in live view, see page 118.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
25
Viewing Photographs
Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.
K button
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Display the photograph you wish to delete.
K button
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the picture.
26
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens is displayed in the
monitor.
Live view switch
2
Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip in your right hand
and cradle the camera body or lens
with your left.
3
Focus.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus.
Focus point
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
27
4
Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start recording. A
recording indicator and the time available are displayed in
the monitor.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
5
End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to end recording.
Rotate the live view switch to exit live view.
Viewing Movies
Press K to start playback and then scroll through
pictures until a movie (indicated by a 1 icon) is
displayed. Press J to start playback and press 1
or K to end playback. For more information, see
page 130.
D
K button
Recording Movies
See page 126 for more information on recording movies.
28
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
Deleting Unwanted Movies
Display the movie you wish to delete (movies are
indicated by 1 icons).
K button
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the movie.
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)
29
Matching Settings to the Subject
or Situation (Scene Mode)
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene mode automatically
optimizes settings to suit the selected scene, making creative photography as simple
as selecting a mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on page 19.
The scenes listed below can be selected
with the mode dial.
k Portrait
l Landscape
p Child
m Sports
n Close up
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial to h and rotating the
command dial until the desired scene appears in the monitor.
o Night Portrait
r Night Landscape
s Party/Indoor
t Beach/Snow
u Sunset
v Dusk/Dawn
w Pet Portrait
x Candlelight
y Blossom
z Autumn Colors
0 Food
30
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
The Mode Dial
The following scenes can be selected with the mode
dial:
Mode dial
k Portrait
Use for portraits with soft, natural-looking
skin tones. If the subject is far from the
background or a telephoto lens is used,
background details will be softened to
lend the composition a sense of depth.
l Landscape
Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight.
A
Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
p Child
Use for snapshots of children. Clothing
and background details are vividly
rendered, while skin tones remain soft and
natural.
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
31
m Sports
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for
dynamic sports shots in which the main
subject stands out clearly.
A
Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
n Close up
Use for close-up shots of flowers, insects,
and other small objects (a macro lens can
be used to focus at very close ranges).
32
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
Other Scenes
The following scenes can be selected by rotating the mode dial to h and rotating
the command dial until the desired scene appears in the monitor.
Mode dial
Command dial
Monitor
o Night Portrait
Use for a natural balance between the
main subject and the background in
portraits taken under low light.
r Night Landscape
Reduce noise and unnatural colors when
photographing night landscapes,
including street lighting and neon signs.
A
Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
33
s Party/Indoor
Capture the effects of indoor background
lighting. Use for parties and other indoor
scenes.
t Beach/Snow
Capture the brightness of sunlit expanses
of water, snow, or sand.
A
Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
u Sunset
Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets
and sunrises.
A
Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
34
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
v Dusk/Dawn
Preserves the colors seen in the weak
natural light before dawn or after sunset.
A
Note
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator
turn off.
w Pet Portrait
Use for portraits of active pets.
A
Note
The AF-assist illuminator turns off.
x Candlelight
For photographs taken by candlelight.
A
Note
The built-in flash turns off.
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
35
y Blossom
Use for fields of flowers, orchards in
bloom, and other landscapes featuring
expanses of blossoms.
A
Note
The built-in flash turns off.
z Autumn Colors
Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in
autumn leaves.
A
Note
The built-in flash turns off.
0 Food
Use for vivid photographs of food.
A
Note
For flash photography, press the M (Y)
button to raise the flash (0 64).
A
Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
36
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)
Special Effects
Special effects can be used when recording images.
%
g
'
(
3
1
2
3
)
Night Vision
Color Sketch
Toy Camera Effect
Miniature Effect
Selective Color
Silhouette
High Key
Low Key
HDR Painting
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial to q and rotating
the command dial until the desired option appears in the monitor.
Mode dial
Command dial
Monitor
% Night Vision
Use under conditions of darkness to
record monochrome images at high ISO
sensitivities.
A
Note
Pictures may be affected by noise in the
form of randomly-spaced bright pixels,
fog, or lines. Autofocus is available in live
view only; manual focus can be used if the
camera is unable to focus. The built-in
flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.
Special Effects
37
g Color Sketch
The camera detects and colors outlines for
a color sketch effect. The effect can be
adjusted in live view (0 41).
A
Note
Movies shot in this mode play back like a
slide show made up of a series of stills.
' Toy Camera Effect
Create photos and movies that appear to
have been shot with a toy camera. The
effect can be adjusted in live view (0 42).
( Miniature Effect
Create photos that appear to be pictures
of dioramas. Works best when shooting
from a high vantage point. Miniature
effect movies play back at high speed,
compressing about 45 minutes of footage
shot at 1920 × 1080/30p into a movie that
plays back in about three minutes. The
effect can be adjusted in live view (0 42).
A
Note
Sound is not recorded with movies. The
built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn
off.
38
Special Effects
3 Selective Color
All colors other than the selected colors
are recorded in black and white. The effect
can be adjusted in live view (0 43).
A
Note
The built-in flash turns off.
1 Silhouette
Silhouette subjects against bright
backgrounds.
A
Note
The built-in flash turns off.
2 High Key
Use with bright scenes to create bright
images that seem filled with light.
A
Note
The built-in flash turns off.
Special Effects
39
3 Low Key
Use with dark scenes to create dark, lowkey images with prominent highlights.
A
Note
The built-in flash turns off.
) HDR Painting
Each time a photo is taken, the camera
shoots two frames at different exposures
and combines them for a painterly effect
that emphasizes detail and color.
A
Note
The effect can not be previewed in live
view. Note that the desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject
move during shooting. During recording,
a message is displayed and no further
photos can be taken. The built-in flash
turns off, continuous shooting is disabled,
and movies are recorded in j mode.
A
NEF (RAW)
NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, g, ', (, 3, and ) modes. Pictures taken when
an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG option is selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG
images. JPEG images created at settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG will be recorded at the selected
JPEG quality, while images recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW) will be recorded as fine-quality
images.
A
g and ( Modes
Autofocus is not available during movie recording. The live view refresh rate will drop,
together with the frame rate for continuous release modes; using autofocus during live view
photography will disrupt the preview.
A
Preventing Blur
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds.
40
Special Effects
Options Available in Live View
❚❚ g Color Sketch
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will
be displayed in the monitor.
Live view switch
2
Adjust options.
Press J to display the options shown at right.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight Vividness or Outlines
and press 4 or 2 to change. Vividness can be
increased to make colors more saturated, or
decreased for a washed-out, monochromatic
effect, while outlines can be made thicker or
thinner. Increasing the thickness of the lines also
makes colors more saturated.
3
Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view, rotate the live
view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs taken using the viewfinder.
Special Effects
41
❚❚ ' Toy Camera Effect
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will
be displayed in the monitor.
Live view switch
2
Adjust options.
Press J to display the options shown at right.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight Vividness or
Vignetting and press 4 or 2 to change. Adjust
vividness to make colors more or less saturated,
vignetting to control the amount of vignetting.
3
Press J.
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view, rotate the live
view switch. The selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to
photographs taken using the viewfinder.
❚❚ ( Miniature Effect
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will
be displayed in the monitor.
Live view switch
42
Special Effects
2
Position the focus point.
Use the multi selector to position the focus point
in the area that will be in focus and then press the
shutter-release button halfway to focus. To
temporarily clear miniature effect options from
the display and enlarge the view in the monitor
for precise focus, press X. Press W (Q) to restore
the miniature effect display.
3
Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect options.
4
Adjust options.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the orientation of the area
that will be in focus and press 1 or 3 to adjust its
width.
5
Return to the live view display.
Press J to return to live view. To exit live view, rotate the live view switch. The
selected settings will continue in effect and will apply to photographs taken
using the viewfinder.
❚❚ 3 Selective Color
1
Select live view.
Rotate the live view switch. The view through the lens will
be displayed in the monitor.
Live view switch
2
Display options.
Press J to display selective color options.
Special Effects
43
3
Select a color.
Selected color
Frame an object in the white square in the center
of the display and press 1 to choose the color of
the object as one that will remain in the final
image (the camera may have difficulty detecting
unsaturated colors; choose a saturated color). To
zoom in on the center of the display for more
precise color selection, press X. Press W (Q) to
zoom out.
4
Choose the color range.
Color range
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of
similar hues that will be included in the final
image. Choose from values between 1 and 7;
note that higher values may include hues from
other colors.
5
Select additional colors.
To select additional colors, rotate the command
dial to highlight another of the three color boxes
at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3 and 4
to select another color. Repeat for a third color if
desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press
O (To remove all colors, press and hold O. A
confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).
6
Return to the live view display.
Press J to return to live view. During shooting, only objects of the selected
hues will be recorded in color; all others will be recorded in black-and-white. To
exit live view, rotate the live view switch. The selected settings will continue in
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the viewfinder.
44
Special Effects
More on Photography
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose how the shutter is released (release
mode), press the s (E/#) button, then highlight
the desired option and press J.
s (E/#) button
Mode
Description
8 Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous L: The camera takes photographs at a slow rate while the shutter-release
button is pressed (0 46).
Continuous H: The camera takes photographs at a fast rate while the shutter-release
9
button is pressed (0 46).
J Quiet shutter release: As for single-frame, except that camera noise is reduced (0 48).
E Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 49).
Delayed remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released 2 s after shutter-release button on optional
" ML-L3 remote control is pressed (0 70).
Quick-response remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released when shutter-release button on optional
# ML-L3 remote control is pressed (0 70).
!
More on Photography
45
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
In ! (Continuous L) and 9 (Continuous H) modes, the camera takes
photographs continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down.
1
Press the s (E/#) button.
s (E/#) button
2
Choose a continuous release mode.
Highlight ! (Continuous L) or 9
(Continuous H) and press J.
3
Focus.
Frame the shot and focus.
4
Take photographs.
The camera will take photographs while the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down.
46
More on Photography
A
The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shooting to
continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. Up to 100 photographs
can be taken in succession. Depending on the battery level and the number of images in the
buffer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. If the battery is exhausted
while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images
transferred to the memory card.
A
Frame Rate
For information on the number of photographs can be taken in continuous release modes,
see page 260. Frame rates may drop when the memory buffer is full or the battery is low.
A
The Built-in Flash
Continuous release modes can not be used with the built-in flash; rotate the mode dial to j
(0 19) or turn the flash off (0 62).
A
Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that can be stored in the
memory buffer at current settings is shown in the viewfinder
exposure-count display while the shutter-release button is pressed.
More on Photography
47
Quiet Shutter Release
Choose this mode to keep camera noise to a minimum. A beep does not sound when
the camera focuses.
1
Press the s (E/#) button.
s (E/#) button
2
Select J (Quiet shutter release).
Highlight J (Quiet shutter release) and press
J.
3
Press the shutter-release button all the way
down.
Press the shutter-release button all the way down
to shoot.
48
More on Photography
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used for self-portraits or group shots that include the
photographer. Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a
stable, level surface.
1
Press the s (E/#) button.
s (E/#) button
2
Select E (Self-timer) mode.
Highlight E (Self-timer) and press J.
3
Frame the photograph.
4
Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button halfway to focus,
and then press the button the rest of the way
down. The self-timer lamp will start to flash and a
beep will begin to sound. Two seconds before
the photo is taken, the lamp will stop flashing and
the beeping will become more rapid. The shutter will be released ten seconds
after the timer starts.
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be taken if the camera is
unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released. To
stop the timer without taking a photograph, turn the camera off.
More on Photography
49
A
Cover the Viewfinder
When taking photos without your eye to the
viewfinder, remove the rubber eyecup (q) and
insert the supplied eyepiece cap as shown (w).
This prevents light entering via the viewfinder
interfering with exposure.
Rubber eyecup
q
Eyepiece cap
w
A
Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the flash to be raised
manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator to be
displayed in the viewfinder (0 23). Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the
self-timer has started.
A
Custom Setting c3 (Self-Timer)
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the number of shots taken,
see Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer; 0 187).
50
More on Photography
Focus (Viewfinder Photography)
This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in
the viewfinder. Focus can be adjusted automatically or manually (see “Focus Mode,”
below). The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 55)
or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing (0 55).
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode
Choose from the following focus modes. Note that AF-S and AF-C are available only in
modes P, S, A, and M.
Option
MF
Description
Camera automatically selects single-servo autofocus if subject is
Auto-servo
stationary, continuous-servo autofocus if subject is moving. Shutter can
AF
only be released if camera is able to focus.
Single-servo For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is
AF
pressed halfway. Shutter can only be released if camera is able to focus.
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutterContinuousrelease button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter can only
servo AF
be released if camera is able to focus (0 184).
Manual focus Focus manually (0 57).
1
Display focus mode options.
AF-A
AF-S
AF-C
Press the P button, then highlight the
current focus mode in the information
display and press J.
P button
2
Information display
Choose a focus mode.
Highlight a focus mode and press J.
More on Photography
51
A
Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera will
initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward the camera while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.
D
Continuous-Servo Autofocus
When Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection; 0 184) and the
camera is in AF-C mode or continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A mode, the camera
gives higher priority to focus response (has a wider focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the
shutter may be released before the in-focus indicator is displayed.
A
Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. The shutter release may
be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually (0 57) or use focus lock
(0 55) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the
photograph.
There is little or no contrast
between the subject and the
background.
The focus point contains
areas of sharply contrasting
brightness.
Example: Subject is the same
color as the background.
The focus point contains
objects at different distances
from the camera.
Example: Subject is half in
the shade.
Example: Subject is inside a
cage.
The subject is dominated by
regular geometric patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of
windows in a skyscraper.
Background objects appear
larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the
frame behind the subject.
The subject contains many
fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or
other subjects that are
small or lack variation in
brightness.
A
The AF-Assist Illuminator
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator will light
automatically to assist the autofocus operation when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway (some restrictions apply; 0 252).
Note that the illuminator may become hot when used multiple
times in quick succession and will turn off automatically to protect
the lamp after a period of continuous use. Normal function will
resume after a brief pause.
52
More on Photography
AF-assist illuminator
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected. Note that d (dynamic-area)
and f (3D-tracking) AF-area modes are not available when AF-S is selected for focus
mode.
Option
Description
For stationary subjects. Focus point is selected manually; camera
c Single-point AF
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.
For non-stationary subjects. In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects
Dynamic-area AF focus point using multi selector (0 55), but camera will focus based
J
(9 points)
on information from surrounding focus points if subject briefly
leaves selected point. Number of focus points varies with mode
selected:
Dynamic-area AF • 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose
K
(21 points)
photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
• 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that
Dynamic-area AF
are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
L
(39 points)
• 39-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects that
are moving quickly and are hard to keep in frame (e.g., birds).
Quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically
from side to side (e.g., tennis players). In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user
selects focus point using multi selector (0 55). If subject moves
f 3D-tracking
after camera has focused, camera uses 3D-tracking to select new
focus point and keep focus locked on original subject while shutterrelease button is pressed halfway.
e Auto-area AF
Camera automatically detects subject and selects focus point.
1
Display AF-area mode options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current AF-area mode in the information
display and press J.
P button
Information display
More on Photography
53
2
Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight an option and press J.
A
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or M are reset when
another shooting mode is selected.
A
3D-Tracking
If subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button and
recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point. Note that when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point
are stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results
with subjects that are the same color as the background.
54
More on Photography
Focus Point Selection
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-area modes other
than e (Auto-area AF), you can choose from 39 focus points, making it possible to
compose photographs with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.
1
Choose an AF-area mode other than e
(Auto-area AF; 0 53).
2
Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select the focus point in
the viewfinder or information display while the
exposure meters are on. Press J to select the
center focus point.
Focus point
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing in AF-A, AF-S, and AF-C
focus modes (0 51), making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a
focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus
(0 52), focus lock can also be used to recompose the photograph after focusing on
another object at the same distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most
effective when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode
(0 53).
1
Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to
initiate focus. Check that the in-focus indicator
(I) appears in the viewfinder.
More on Photography
55
2
Lock focus.
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the shutter-release
button pressed halfway (q), press the A (L)
button (w) to lock focus. Focus will remain
locked while the A (L) button is pressed, even if
you later remove your finger from the shutterrelease button.
Shutter-release button
A (L) button
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus indicator
appears, and remain locked until you remove your finger from the shutterrelease button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the A (L) button (see
above).
3
Recompose the photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked between shots if you
keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(AF-S) or keep the A (L) button pressed,
allowing several photographs in succession to be
taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus
lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.
A
Autoexposure Lock
Pressing the A (L) button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0 91).
56
More on Photography
Manual Focus
Manual focus can be used when autofocus is not available or does not produce the
desired results (0 52).
1
Select manual focus.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M, M/A-M, or A/M-M
A-M
M/A-M
mode switch mode switch
mode switch, slide the switch to M.
If the lens is not equipped a focus-mode switch, select MF (manual focus) for
Focus mode (0 51).
2
Focus.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the
image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder
is in focus. Photographs can be taken at any time, even
when the image is not in focus.
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster, the
viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the
subject in the selected focus point is in focus (the focus point
can be selected from any of the 39 focus points). After
positioning the subject in the selected focus point, press the
shutter-release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring
until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with the subjects listed on
page 52, the in-focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not
in focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.
More on Photography
57
A
Selecting Manual Focus with the Camera
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual override) or A/M
(autofocus with manual override/AF priority), manual focus can also
be selected by setting the camera focus mode to MF (manual focus;
0 51). Focus can then be adjusted manually, regardless of the mode
selected with the lens.
A
Focal Plane Position
The position of the focal plane is indicated by the focal plane
mark on the camera body. The distance between the lens
mounting flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5 mm
Focal plane mark
58
More on Photography
Image Quality and Size
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photograph
occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher quality images can be printed at larger
sizes but also require more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored
on the memory card (0 281).
Image Quality
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).
Option File type
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG fine
NEF (RAW) + NEF/
JPEG normal JPEG
NEF (RAW) +
JPEG basic
Description
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality JPEG
image.
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-quality
JPEG image.
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality
JPEG image.
Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card.
NEF (RAW)
NEF Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted after
shooting.
JPEG fine
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
JPEG basic
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
1
Display image quality options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image quality in the information
display and press J.
P button
2
Information display
Choose a file type.
Highlight an option and press J.
More on Photography
59
A
NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.
White balance bracketing (0 108), high dynamic range (HDR, 0 96), and print date (0 190)
are not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2
(available separately; 0 236) or ViewNX 2 (supplied). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can
be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu (0 213).
A
NEF (RAW) + JPEG
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG
image will be displayed. When photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF
and JPEG images will be deleted.
60
More on Photography
Image Size
Choose a size for JPEG images:
Size (pixels)
Print size (cm/in.) *
# Large
6000 × 4000
50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3
$ Medium
4496 × 3000
38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10
% Small
2992 × 2000
25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels
divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).
Image size
1
Display image size options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current image size in the information display
and press J.
P button
2
Information display
Choose an image size.
Highlight an option and press J.
More on Photography
61
Using the Built-in Flash
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing poorly lit or backlit
subjects.
Auto Pop-up Modes
In i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g , and ' modes, the built-in flash automatically pops up and
fires as required.
1
Choose a flash mode.
Keeping the M (Y)
button pressed, rotate
the command dial until
the desired flash mode
appears in the
information display.
2
+
M (Y) button
Command
dial
Take pictures.
The flash will pop up as required when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway, and
fire when a photograph is taken. If the flash does
not pop up automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it
by hand. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage the flash.
62
More on Photography
Information display
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
• No (auto flash): When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit, the flash pops
up automatically when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and fires as
required. Not available in o mode.
• Njo (auto with red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash pops up and
fires as required, but before it fires the red-eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce
“red-eye.” Not available in o mode.
• j (off ): The flash does not fire.
• Njr (auto slow sync with red-eye reduction): As for auto with red-eye
reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background
lighting. Use for portraits taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode.
• Nr (auto slow sync): Slow shutter speeds are used to capture background
lighting in shots taken at night or under low light. Available in o mode.
A
The Information Display
Flash mode can also be selected in the information display.
More on Photography
63
Manual Pop-up Modes
In P, S, A, M, and 0 modes, the flash must be raised manually. The flash will not fire if it
is not raised.
1
Raise the flash.
Press the M (Y) button to raise the flash.
M (Y) button
2
Choose a flash mode (P, S, A, and M modes only).
Keeping the M (Y)
button pressed, rotate
the command dial until
the desired flash mode
appears in the
information display.
3
+
M (Y) button
Command
dial
Take pictures.
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.
64
More on Photography
Information display
❚❚ Flash Modes
The following flash modes are available:
• N (fill flash): The flash fires with every shot.
• Nj (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash fires with every shot, but
before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not
available in 0 mode.
• Njp (red-eye reduction with slow sync): As for “red-eye reduction”, above,
except that shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at
night or under low light. Use when you want to include background lighting in
portraits. Not available in modes S, M, and 0.
• Np (slow sync): As for “fill flash”, above, except that shutter speed slows
automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use
when you want to capture both subject and background. Not available in modes
S, M, and 0.
• Nt (slow rear-curtain sync): As for “rear-curtain sync”, below, except that
shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or
under low light. Use when you want to capture both subject and background. Not
available in modes S, M, and 0.
• Nq (rear-curtain sync): The flash fires just before the shutter closes, creating a
stream of light behind moving light sources as shown below at right. Not available
in modes P, A, and 0.
Front-curtain sync
Rear-curtain sync
More on Photography
65
A
Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use, press it gently downward
until the latch clicks into place.
A
The Built-in Flash
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash, see page 230. Remove
lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not
be used in the macro range of zoom lenses with a macro function.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for
several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after a short pause.
A
Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash
Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in flash is used:
Mode
Shutter speed
Mode
Shutter speed
1/200–30 s
S
i, k, p, n, s, w, 0, g,
1/200–1/60 s
1/200–30 s, Bulb, Time
', P, A
M
1/200–1 s
o
1
Shutter speeds as slow as /30 s are available in mode k when vibration reduction is on.
Shutter speeds as slow as 30 s are available in modes P and A when slow sync, rear curtain +
slow sync, or slow sync + red-eye reduction is selected (0 65).
A
Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.
100
1.4
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
66
200
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
22
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
400
800 1600 3200
2.8
4
5.6
8
4
5.6
8
11
5.6
8
11
16
8
11
16
22
11
16
22
32
16
22
32
—
22
32
—
—
32
—
—
—
More on Photography
6400 12800
11
16
16
22
22
32
32
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Approximate range
m
ft
1.0–8.5
3ft 3in.–27ft 11n.
0.7–6.0
2ft 4in.–19ft 8in.
0.6–4.2
2ft–13ft 9in.
0.6–3.0
2ft–9ft 10in.
0.6–2.1
2ft–6ft 11in.
0.6–1.5
2ft–4ft 11in.
0.6–1.1
2ft–3ft 7in.
0.6–0.7
2ft–2ft 4in.
ISO Sensitivity
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the amount of light
available. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. Noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines) is however more likely at settings between Hi 0.3 (equivalent to
ISO 16000) and Hi 1 (equivalent to ISO 25600). Choosing Auto allows the camera to
set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions; to use auto in P, S,
A, and M modes, select Auto ISO sensitivity control for the ISO sensitivity settings
item in the shooting menu (0 180).
Mode
i, j, %
P, S, A, M
Other shooting modes
1
ISO sensitivity
Auto
100–12800 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1
Auto; 100–12800 in steps of 1/3 EV; Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1
Display ISO sensitivity options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current ISO sensitivity in the information
display and press J.
P button
2
Information display
Choose an ISO sensitivity.
Highlight an option and press J.
More on Photography
67
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.
D
Before Shooting
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view
the results in the monitor. To ensure that shooting starts at the desired time, check that the
camera clock is set correctly (0 201).
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To
ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged.
1
Select Interval timer shooting.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Interval timer shooting in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2
Choose a starting time.
Choose from the following starting triggers.
• To start shooting immediately, highlight Now
and press 2. Shooting begins about three
seconds after settings are completed;
proceed to Step 3.
• To choose a starting time, highlight Start time
and press 2 to display the start time
options shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to
highlight hours or minutes and press 1 or
3 to change. Press 2 to continue.
3
Choose the interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours, minutes, or
seconds and press 1 or 3 to choose an
interval longer than the slowest anticipated
shutter speed. Press 2 to continue.
68
More on Photography
4
Choose the number of intervals.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight number of
intervals (i.e., the number of times the
camera shoots); press 1 or 3 to change.
Press 2 to continue.
5
Start shooting.
Highlight On and press J (to return to the
shooting menu without starting the interval
timer, highlight Off and press J). The first
series of shots will be taken at the specified
starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in
Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been
taken; while shooting is in progress, the memory card access lamp will flash at
regular intervals. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to
record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot, intervals may
be skipped if the camera is still in the process of recording the previous interval.
If shooting can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter speed
of “Bulb” or “Time” is currently selected in shooting mode M or the start time is
in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the monitor.
A
Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 50).
A
Other Settings
Settings can not be adjusted during interval timer photography. Regardless of the release
mode selected, the camera takes one photograph at each interval; in mode J, camera noise
will be reduced. Bracketing (0 108), multiple exposure (0 98), and high dynamic range
(HDR; 0 96) can not be used.
A
Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
To interrupt interval timer shooting, turn the camera off or rotate the mode dial to a new
setting. Returning the monitor to the storage position does not interrupt interval timer
shooting.
More on Photography
69
Remote Control Photography
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control
The optional ML-L3 remote control (0 237) can be used to reduce camera shake or
for self-portraits. Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a
stable, level surface.
1
Press the s (E/#) button.
s (E/#) button
2
Select a remote control mode.
Highlight " (Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or
# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3)) and
press J.
3
Frame the photograph.
Check focus by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway.
4
Take the photograph.
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less, aim the
transmitter on the ML-L3 at either of the
infrared receivers on the camera (0 1, 2) and
press the ML-L3 shutter-release button. In
delayed remote mode, the self-timer lamp will
light for about two seconds before the
shutter is released. In quick-response remote
mode, the self-timer lamp will flash after the
shutter has been released.
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be taken if the camera is
unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released.
70
More on Photography
A
Before Using the ML-L3 Remote Control
Before using the ML-L3 for the first time, remove the clear plastic battery-insulator sheet.
A
Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the rubber
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 50).
A
The Camera Shutter-Release Button/Other Remote Control Devices
If an ML-L3 remote release mode is selected and the shutter is released by any means other
than an ML-L3 remote control (for example, the camera shutter-release button or the shutter
button on an optional remote cord or wireless remote controller), the camera will function in
single-frame release mode.
A
Exiting Remote Control Mode
Remote control mode is cancelled automatically if no photograph is taken before the time
selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3), 0 187). Remote control
mode will also be cancelled if the camera is turned off, a two-button reset is performed
(0 72), or shooting options are reset using Reset shooting menu.
A
Using the Built-in Flash
Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes (0 64), press the M (Y)
button to raise the flash and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 23).
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the shutter-release button on the
ML-L3 is pressed. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond to the ML-L3 shutterrelease button once the flash has charged. In auto pop-up modes, the flash will begin
charging when a remote control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will
automatically pop up and fire when required.
A
Wireless Remote Controllers
Remote control is also available with various combinations of WR-R10, WR-T10, and WR-1
wireless remote controllers (0 237), when the shutter-release buttons on the wireless
remote controllers perform the same functions as the camera shutter-release button. For
more information, see the manual provided with the remote controllers.
More on Photography
71
Restoring Default Settings
The camera settings listed below and on page 73 can be
restored to default values by holding the G and P
buttons down together for more than two seconds
(these buttons are marked by a green dot). The
information display turns off briefly while settings are
G button
reset.
P button
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Information Display
Option
Image quality
Image size
Auto bracketing
P, S, A, M
HDR (high dynamic range)
P, S, A, M
Active D-Lighting
P, S, A, M
White balance
P, S, A, M
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M
k, l, p, m, n, o, r, s, t,
u, v, w, x, y, z, 0, g, ',
(, 3, 1, 2, 3, )
Picture Control settings
P, S, A, M
Focus mode
Viewfinder
Shooting modes other
than %
Live view/movie
Default
JPEG normal
Large
0
59
61
Off
108
Off
i, j, k, l, p, o, r, s,
t, u, v, y, z, g, ', 3, ),
P, S, A, M
94
Live view/movie
k, l, p, o, s, t, u, v, x,
101
y, z
m, r, w, %, g, ', 3, 1,
2, 3, ), P, S, A, M
67
n, 0
Metering
P, S, A, M
111 Flash mode
i, k, p, n, w, g, '
o
Auto
Auto
100
Auto
Unmodified *
Option
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
n, x, 0, 1, 2, 3
m, w
More on Photography
Single-point AF
Dynamic-area AF
(39 points)
96
AF-A
51
AF-S
119
s
P, S, A, M
Flash compensation
P, S, A, M
Exposure compensation
%, P, S, A, M
* Current Picture Control only.
72
Default
0
53
Auto-area AF
Face-priority AF
Wide-area AF
120
Normal-area AF
Matrix metering 90
Auto
Auto slow sync
63,
Auto+red-eye
65
reduction
Fill flash
Off
93
Off
92
❚❚ Other Settings
Option
Release mode
m, w
Other shooting modes
Focus point
AE/AF lock hold
Shooting modes other
than i and j
Flexible program
P
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure mode
P, S, A, M
Default
Continuous H
Single frame
Center
Off
Off
Off
0
Option
Special effects mode
g
45
Vividness
Outlines
55
'
Vividness
194
Vignetting
(
84
Orientation
Width
3
98
Color
Color range
Default
0
0
0
41
0
0
42
Landscape
Normal
42
Off
3
43
More on Photography
73
Location Data
Embedding Location Data in Photos and Movies
The built-in location data unit can record information on the camera’s current
position (latitude, longitude, altitude) and the current time (UTC) as provided by
satellite navigation systems and embed it in photographs and movies taken with the
camera. The location data function works best in locations that offer an
unobstructed view of the sky.
1
Select Location data.
Press the G button to display the menus,
then highlight Location data in the setup
menu and press 2.
G button
2
Select Record location data.
Highlight Record location data and press
2.
3
Select On.
Highlight On and press J to enable the
camera’s built-in location data unit. The
camera will begin receiving location data
from navigation satellites.
A
Before Enabling the Location Data Function
Before using the location data function, read the warnings on pages viii to xv and make sure
that the clock is set to the correct time and date as described on page 201. To prevent the
camera turning off unexpectedly, make sure the battery is charged.
74
More on Photography
4
Check satellite signal strength.
Press the R button and check satellite signal
strength in the information display.
R button
5
Take pictures.
The location data obtained via the navigation satellite system will be recorded
with each photograph or movie taken and can be viewed in the playback photo
info displays (0 136) or plotted on a map using the supplied ViewNX 2 software
(0 154).
6
Turn the location data function off.
To turn the location data function off when it
is no longer needed, select Off for Location
data > Record location data in the setup
menu.
A
The Satellite Signal Indicator
Signal strength is shown in the location data display as follows:
• # (static): Camera records latitude, longitude, and altitude.
• $ (static): Camera records latitude and longitude only; altitude is
not recorded.
• % (flashing): Location not recorded.
More on Photography
75
Track Logs
The built in location data unit can log information on the camera’s current position
(latitude, longitude, altitude) and the current time (UTC) as provided by satellite
navigation systems. Location data are recorded automatically at preset intervals and
saved to a track log file stored separately from the pictures taken with the camera.
The supplied ViewNX 2 software (0 154) can then be used to view the track on a
map.
1
Select On for Record location Data.
Press the G button to display the menus
and select Location data > Record location
data in the setup menu. Highlight On and
press J.
2
Select Create log.
Highlight Create log and press 2.
3
Choose the log interval and log length.
Highlight Log interval (s) and press 4 or 2
to choose how often the camera logs
location data (the log interval, in seconds),
then highlight Log length (h) and press 4 or
2 to choose how long (in hours) the log will
continue.
4
Start the log.
Highlight Log location data and press 2,
then highlight Start and press J. Location
data will be logged at the interval and for the
period chosen in Step 3. The time remaining
is shown in the Location data display. Note
that location data will be logged even when
the standby timer has expired or the camera
is off, increasing the drain on the battery.
76
More on Photography
G button
5
End the log.
To end the log and save it to the memory
card before the selected log length is
reached, select Location data > Create log
> Log location data, then highlight End and
press J. The memory card access lamp will
light while the camera saves the log to the
memory card; do not remove the battery or
memory card while the access lamp is lit.
A
Pausing Logs
To pause the log, select Pause in the Create log display. The log can
be resumed by selecting Restart.
A
Logging Location Data
When tracking is active, the camera continues to monitor satellite signals even when off. To
prevent logs being interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged before enabling
the tracking function.
A
The Track Log Display
While tracking is active, the indicator at right appears in the
information display.
A
Viewing Log Dates
Selecting Log list for Location data displays a list of the dates on
which logs were recorded. In the case of dates with multiple logs, the
individual logs are identified by number.
More on Photography
77
Deleting Logs
Follow the steps below to delete all or selected logs.
1
Select Log list.
Select Location data in the setup menu,
then highlight Log list and press J.
2
Press O.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.
O button
3
Select logs.
To delete selected logs, highlight items in the list
and press 2 to select or deselect, and then
press J to proceed.
To delete all logs, press X and then press J.
X button
4
Select Yes.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J to delete the logs.
A
Copying Logs to a Computer
Logs are stored in the “NIKON” > “GNSS” folder on the memory card and have names
consisting of “N” followed by the log date (yymmdd), a single-character identifier from 0 to
Z assigned in ascending order by the camera, and the extension “.log” (thus the first log
recorded on October 1 2013 will be named “N1310010.log”). Logs can be copied to a
computer by inserting the memory card in a card reader or card slot and transferring the files
using Nikon Transfer 2. Logs are in NMEA format but may not display correctly in some
applications or on some devices.
78
More on Photography
GPS Options
Use the Location data > GPS options item in the setup menu to adjust settings for
the built-in location data unit.
❚❚ Standby Timer
Choose whether or not to use the standby timer with the location data function.
Option
Description
Standby timer enabled; the camera will enter standby if no operations are
performed for the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 186) >
Standby timer (to allow the camera time to acquire location data, the delay is
Enable
extended by up to one minute after the standby timer is activated or the camera is
turned on). This reduces the drain on the battery. Note that the camera will
continue to acquire location data for a set period after the timer expires.
Disable Standby timer disabled, ensuring uninterrupted recording of location data.
❚❚ Set Clock from Satellite
Choose Yes to set the camera clock based on the time provided by the satellite
navigation system.
More on Photography
79
❚❚ Update A-GPS File
Using assisted GPS (A-GPS or aGPS) files reduces the time needed for the built-in
location data unit to determine the current position. Assisted GPS files can be
updated as described below.
1
Download the latest assisted GPS file.
Download the current assisted GPS file from the following URL:
http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
2
Copy the file to the “NIKON” folder on the memory card.
Insert the memory card in a card reader or card slot and copy the file to the
“NIKON” folder in the root directory of the memory card (if the folder does not
already exist, create a new folder and name it “NIKON”).
3
Insert the memory card in the camera.
4
Turn the camera on.
5
Update the file.
In the camera setup menu, navigate to the Location data > GPS options, then
highlight Update A-GPS data and press 2. Highlight Yes and press J to
update assisted GPS data. The update takes about two minutes.
D
Expiry Date
Assisted GPS files remain valid for about two weeks after download
and can not be used after their expiry date (an error message will be
displayed if you attempt to use an out-of-date file). The expiry date
for the current assisted GPS file can be viewed in the camera Update
A-GPS data display. Update assisted GPS files before using the
location data function; expired files can not be used to assist the
acquisition of location data.
80
More on Photography
D
Location Data
Local geographic and atmospheric conditions may prevent or delay the acquisition of
location data. The camera may be unable to receive location data indoors, underground, or
in metal containers or the vicinity of bridges and other large structures, trees, power lines, or
other objects that block or reflect satellite signals. Pay attention to your footing and
surroundings when looking for locations with good reception. The positions of navigation
satellites are continuously changing, preventing or delaying the acquisition of location data
at certain hours of the day. The presence of cellular telephones or other devices that
transmit on frequencies close to those of navigation satellites may also interfere with the
acquisition of location data.
Note that in some cases the camera may take some time to acquire a signal, for example
immediately after the battery is inserted or when the record location data function is
enabled for the first time, or after an extended period of disuse. Location data for movies are
for the start of recording. No data will be added to track logs while the camera is unable to
receive location data; in addition, track logs will not be recorded if the clock is not set, the
memory card is not inserted, or if any of the following operations are performed while the
location data function is enabled: the battery runs low or is removed, Off is selected for
Location data > Record location data in the setup menu, or an optional location data unit
is connected. Note that turning the camera off does not disable the location data function.
Depending on the accuracy of the data acquired from the satellite system and the effects of
local topography on satellite reception, the location data recorded with pictures may differ
from the actual location by up to several hundred meters.
A
Connecting Optional Location Data Units
Optional Nikon location data units can be connected to the camera accessory terminal using
the cable supplied with the unit (0 237). Be sure the camera is off before connecting the
unit. When an optional location data unit is attached, the built-in location data unit will be
disabled and the camera will receive location data from the optional unit only, but the
Location data > GPS options > Standby timer and Set clock from satellite option in the
setup menu can still be used (0 79). Track logs can not be created while an optional location
data unit is connected.
See the manual provided with the location data unit for more information.
More on Photography
81
P, S, A, and M Modes
Shutter Speed and Aperture
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter
speed and aperture:
Mode
P
S
A
M
82
Description
Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which
Programmed auto
there is little time to adjust camera settings. Camera sets shutter
(0 84)
speed and aperture for optimal exposure.
Shutter-priority auto Use to freeze or blur motion. User chooses shutter speed; camera
(0 85)
selects aperture for best results.
Use to blur background or bring both foreground and
Aperture-priority auto
background into focus. User chooses aperture; camera selects
(0 86)
shutter speed for best results.
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed
Manual (0 87)
to “Bulb” or “Time” for long time-exposures.
P, S, A, and M Modes
A
Shutter Speed and Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture are shown in the viewfinder and information display.
Shutter speed
Aperture
Fast shutter speeds (1/1600 s in this example)
freeze motion.
Slow shutter speeds (here 1 s) blur motion.
Large apertures (such as f/5.6; remember, the
lower the f-number, the larger the aperture)
blur details in front of and behind the main
subject.
Small apertures (f/22 in this case) bring both
background and foreground into focus.
P, S, A, and M Modes
83
Mode P (Programmed Auto)
This mode is recommended for snapshots or
whenever you want to leave the camera in charge of
shutter speed and aperture. The camera
automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most situations.
Mode dial
To take pictures in programmed auto mode, rotate the
mode dial to P.
A
Flexible Program
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating
the command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate the dial right for large apertures (low fnumbers) and fast shutter speeds, left for small apertures (high f-numbers) and slow shutter
speeds. All combinations produce the same exposure.
Rotate right to blur background details or freeze motion.
Command dial
Rotate left to increase depth of field or blur motion.
While flexible program is in effect, a U (R) indicator appears in the
viewfinder and information display. To restore default shutter speed
and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the indicator is
no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
84
P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
This mode lets you control shutter speed: choose fast shutter speeds to “freeze”
motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects. The
camera automatically adjusts aperture for optimal exposure.
Fast shutter speeds (e.g., 1/1600 s) freeze motion.
Slow shutter speeds (e.g., 1 s) blur motion.
To choose a shutter speed:
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
2
Choose a shutter speed.
Mode dial
Rotate the command dial to choose the
desired shutter speed: rotate right for faster
speeds, left for slower speeds.
Command dial
P, S, A, and M Modes
85
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In this mode, you can adjust aperture to control depth of field (the distance in front
of and behind the main subject that appears to be in focus). The camera
automatically adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure.
Large apertures (low f-numbers, e.g. f/5.6) blur
details in front of and behind the main subject.
Small apertures (high f-numbers, e.g. f/22) bring
the foreground and background into focus.
To choose an aperture:
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
2
Choose an aperture.
Mode dial
Rotate the command dial left for larger
apertures (lower f-numbers), right for smaller
apertures (higher f-numbers).
Command dial
86
P, S, A, and M Modes
Mode M (Manual)
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture. Shutter speeds of
“Bulb” and “Time” are available for long time-exposures of moving lights, the stars,
night scenery, or fireworks (0 88).
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
2
Choose aperture and shutter speed.
Mode dial
Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter speed and
aperture. Shutter speed is selected by rotating the command dial (right for
faster speeds, left for slower). To adjust aperture, keep the E (N) button
pressed while rotating the command dial (left for larger apertures/lower
f-numbers and right for smaller apertures/higher f-numbers).
Shutter speed
Command
dial
Aperture
E (N) button
Command
dial
A
The Exposure Indicator
If a CPU lens is attached (0 226) and a shutter speed other than “Bulb” or “Time” is selected,
the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and information display shows whether the
photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings.
Optimal exposure
Underexposed by 1/3 EV
Overexposed by over 2 EV
P, S, A, and M Modes
87
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter speeds for long timeexposures of moving lights, the stars, night
scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while
the shutter-release button is pressed all the way
Length of exposure: 35 s
down. To prevent blur, use a tripod or an
Aperture: f/25
optional wireless remote controller (0 237) or
remote cord (0 237).
• Time (&): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button on the camera or on
an optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller. The shutter
remains open for thirty minutes or until the button is pressed a second time.
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure, remove the
rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 50). To
prevent loss of power before the exposure is complete, use a fully charged battery.
Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present
in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for Long exposure NR in the
shooting menu (0 179).
❚❚ Bulb
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
2
Choose the shutter speed.
Mode dial
Rotate the command dial to choose a
shutter speed of Bulb (A).
Command dial
3
Take the photograph.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera, optional
wireless remote controller or remote cord all the way down. Take your finger
from the shutter-release button when the exposure is complete.
88
P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Time
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
2
Choose the shutter speed.
Mode dial
Rotate the command dial left to choose a
shutter speed of “Time” (&).
Command dial
3
Open the shutter.
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional
remote control, remote cord, or wireless remote controller all the way down.
4
Close the shutter.
Repeat the operation performed in Step 3 (shooting ends automatically if the
button is not pressed after 30 minutes).
A
ML-L3 Remote Controls
If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select one of the following remote control
modes as described on page 70: " (Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or # (Quick-response
remote (ML-L3)). Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote control, pictures will be taken
in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/A is selected for shutter speed.
P, S, A, and M Modes
89
Exposure
Metering
Choose how the camera sets exposure.
Method
L Matrix metering
M
Center-weighted
metering
N Spot metering
1
Description
Produces natural results in most situations. The camera meters a wide
area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone distribution, color,
composition, and distance.
Classic meter for portraits. Camera meters entire frame but assigns
greatest weight to center area. Recommended when using filters with
an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Choose this mode to ensure that subject will be correctly exposed, even
when background is much brighter or darker. Camera meters current
focus point; use to meter off-center subjects.
Display metering options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current metering method in the information
display and press J.
P button
2
Information display
Choose a metering method.
Highlight an option and press J.
A
Spot Metering
If e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder photography (0 53),
the camera will meter the center focus point.
90
P, S, A, and M Modes
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using M (Center-weighted
metering) and N (Spot metering) to meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is
not available in i or j mode.
1
Meter exposure.
Press the shutter-release button halfway.
2
Lock exposure.
With the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(q) and the subject positioned in the focus point,
press the A (L) button (w) to lock exposure.
Shutter-release
button
A (L) button
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator
will appear in the viewfinder.
3
Recompose the photograph.
Keeping the A (L) button pressed, recompose
the photograph and shoot.
A
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the
metered value for exposure:
Mode
Programmed auto
Shutter-priority auto
Aperture-priority auto
Setting
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 84)
Shutter speed
Aperture
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect.
P, S, A, and M Modes
91
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the
camera, making pictures brighter or darker (0 260). It is most effective when used
with M (Center-weighted metering) or N (Spot metering) (0 90).
–1 EV
No exposure compensation
To choose a value for exposure
compensation, keep the E (N)
button pressed and rotate the
command dial until the desired
value is selected in the viewfinder
E (N) button Command dial
or information display. Normal
exposure can be restored by
setting exposure compensation to
–0.3 EV
±0 (adjustments to exposure
compensation in % mode will be
reset when another mode is
selected). Exposure
compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.
+1 EV
+2 EV
A
The Information Display
Exposure compensation options can also be accessed from the
information display (0 7).
A
Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator.
A
Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash
level.
A
Bracketing
For information on automatically varying exposure over a series of shots, see page 108.
92
P, S, A, and M Modes
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level suggested by the
camera, changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background.
Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections (0 261).
Keep the M (Y) and E (N) buttons
pressed and rotate the command dial
until the desired value is selected in
the viewfinder or information display.
In general, positive values make the
M (Y) button
main subject seem brighter while
negative values make it seem darker.
Normal flash output can be restored
by setting flash compensation to ±0.
Flash compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.
–0.3 EV
E (N) button
Command dial
+1 EV
A
The Information Display
Flash compensation options can also be accessed from the
information display (0 7).
A
Optional Flash Units
Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that support the Nikon
Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 232). The flash compensation selected with the
optional flash unit is added to the flash compensation selected with the camera.
P, S, A, and M Modes
93
Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows, creating photographs
with natural contrast. Use for high contrast scenes, for example when
photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking
pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting is not recommended
in mode M; in other modes, it is most effective when used with L (Matrix metering;
0 90).
Active D-Lighting: ! Off
1
Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
Display Active D-Lighting options.
Press the P button, then highlight Active
D-Lighting in the information display and
press J.
P button
2
Choose an option.
Highlight an option and press J (0 261).
94
P, S, A, and M Modes
Information display
D
Active D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken with
Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting
can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above.
A
“Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”
Active D-Lighting adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while
the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0 207) brightens shadows in images after
shooting.
A
Bracketing
For information on automatically varying Active D-Lighting over a series of shots, see page
108.
P, S, A, and M Modes
95
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
High Dynamic Range (HDR) combines two exposures to form a single image that
captures a wide range of tones from shadows to highlights, even with high-contrast
subjects. HDR is most effective when used with L (Matrix metering) (0 90). It can
not be used to record NEF (RAW) images. While HDR is in effect, the flash can not be
used and continuous shooting is not available.
+
First exposure (darker)
1
Second exposure (brighter)
Display HDR (High Dynamic Range)
options.
Press the P button, then highlight HDR (High
Dynamic Range) in the information display
and press J.
2
P button
Choose an option.
Highlight v Auto, 2 Extra high,
S High, T Normal, U Low, or 6 Off
and press J.
When an option other than 6 Off is selected,
u will be displayed in the viewfinder.
96
Combined HDR image
P, S, A, and M Modes
Information display
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when the
shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down. “l u” will flash in the viewfinder
while the images are combined; no photographs
can be taken until recording is complete. HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is
taken; to turn off HDR before shooting, rotate the
mode dial to a setting other than P, S, A, or M.
D
Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may not be achieved if the
camera or subject move during shooting. Depending on the scene, the effect may not be
visible, shadows may appear around bright objects, or halos may appear around dark
objects. Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects.
P, S, A, and M Modes
97
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three exposures in a single
photograph. Multiple exposures produce colors noticeably superior to those in
software-generated photographic overlays created from existing images.
❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view before proceeding.
A
Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meter-off delay using
Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers) > Standby timer (0 186). The maximum interval
between exposures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c2. Shooting
will end automatically if no operations are performed for a set period and a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point.
1
Select Multiple exposure.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Multiple exposure in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2
Enable multiple exposure mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure mode and
press 2.
The options shown at right will be displayed.
Highlight On and press J.
98
P, S, A, and M Modes
3
Choose the number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of
exposures that will be combined to form a
single photograph and press J.
4
Choose the amount of gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press 2.
The following options will be displayed.
Highlight an option and press J.
• On: Gain is adjusted according to number
of exposures actually recorded (gain for
each exposure is set to 1/2 for two
exposures, 1/3 for three exposures).
• Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording
multiple exposure. Recommended if
background is dark.
5
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In single-frame release mode, one
photograph will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed; continue
shooting until all exposures have been recorded. In continuous high-speed
and continuous low-speed release modes (0 46), the camera records all
exposures in a single burst; shooting will pause after each multiple exposure.
P, S, A, and M Modes
99
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of
exposures have been taken, select Off for Multiple exposure >
Multiple exposure mode in the shooting menu. A multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been
recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will be adjusted
to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that
shooting will end automatically if:
• The mode dial is rotated to a setting other than P, S, A, or M
• A two-button reset is performed (0 72)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• One of the exposures is deleted
A
The Multiple Exposure Indicator
A $ icon appears in the information display when multiple exposure
shooting is enabled. The icon flashes while shooting is in progress.
D
Multiple Exposures
The information listed in the playback photo information display (including metering,
exposure, shooting mode, focal length, date of recording and camera orientation) is for the
first shot in the multiple exposure.
100 P, S, A, and M Modes
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source.
Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources; other values can be
selected if necessary according to the type of source:
Description
Automatic white balance adjustment. Recommended in most situations.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with the light sources listed on page 102.
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
Use with the flash.
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
Measure white balance or copy white balance from existing photo
L Preset manual
(0 104).
v
J
I
H
N
G
M
1
Option
Auto
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
Shade
Display white balance options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current white balance setting in the
information display and press J.
P button
2
Information display
Choose a white balance option.
Highlight an option and press J.
P, S, A, and M Modes 101
A
The Shooting Menu
White balance can be selected using the White balance option in
the shooting menu (0 177), which also can be used to fine-tune
white balance (0 103) or measure a value for preset white balance
(0 104).
The I Fluorescent option in the White balance menu can be used
to select the light source from the bulb types shown at right.
A
Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to
the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5000–
5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent
light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature
appear tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the following
color temperatures (all figures are approximate):
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
• H (direct sunlight): 5200 K
• J (incandescent)/
• N (flash): 5400 K
I (warm-white fluorescent): 3000 K
• G (cloudy): 6000 K
• I (white fluorescent): 3700 K
• I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
• I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K
• I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K
• I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
• M (shade): 8000 K
A
Bracketing
For information on automatically varying white balance settings over a series of shots, see
page 108.
102 P, S, A, and M Modes
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of the
light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image. White balance is
fine-tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu.
1
Select a white balance option.
Press G to display the menus, then
highlight White balance in the shooting
menu and press 2. Highlight the desired
white balance option and press 2 (if
G button
Fluorescent is selected, highlight the
desired lighting type and press 2; note that
fine-tuning is not available with Preset
manual).
2
Fine-tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white
balance.
A
White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative,
not absolute. For example, moving the cursor
to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J
(incandescent) is selected will make
photographs slightly “colder” but will not
actually make them blue.
Increase green
Increase
blue
Increase
amber
Increase magenta
Coordinates
Adjustment
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J.
P, S, A, and M Modes 103
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting
under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. Two
methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photo
Measure
and white balance measured by camera (see below).
Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card (0 107).
❚❚ Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance
1
Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the
final photograph.
2
Display white balance options.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight White balance in the shooting
menu and press 2 to display white balance
options. Highlight Preset manual and press
G button
2.
3
Select Measure.
Highlight Measure and press 2.
104 P, S, A, and M Modes
4
Select Yes.
The menu shown at right will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
The camera will enter preset measurement
mode.
When the camera is ready to measure white
balance, a flashing D (L) will appear in
the viewfinder and information display.
5
Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder
and press the shutter-release button all the
way down. No photograph will be recorded;
white balance can be measured accurately
even when the camera is not in focus.
P, S, A, and M Modes 105
6
Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a value for
white balance, the message shown at right
will be displayed and a will flash in the
viewfinder for about eight seconds before
the camera returns to shooting mode. To
return to shooting mode immediately, press
the shutter-release button halfway.
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure white
balance. A message will appear in the
information display and a flashing b a
will appear in the viewfinder for about
eight seconds. Return to Step 5 and
measure white balance again.
D
Measuring Preset White Balance
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode
will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers; 0 186). The default
setting is eight seconds.
D
Preset White Balance
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time; the existing value will
be replaced when a new value is measured. Note that exposure is automatically increased
by 1 EV when measuring white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that
the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 87).
A
Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset white balance in the
information display (0 101), press J for a few seconds. If white balance has been assigned
to the Fn button (0 193), white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by
keeping the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white balance with
the Fn button and command dial.
A
Gray Panels
For more precise results, measure white balance using a standard gray panel.
106 P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a photograph on the
memory card.
1
Select Preset manual.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight White balance in the shooting
menu and press 2 to display white balance
options. Highlight Preset manual and press
G button
2.
2
Select Use photo.
Highlight Use photo and press 2.
3
Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2 (to skip
the remaining steps and use the image last
selected for preset white balance, select This
image).
4
Choose a folder.
Highlight the folder containing the source
image and press 2.
5
Highlight the source image.
To view the highlighted image full frame,
press and hold the X button.
6
Copy white balance.
Press J to set preset white balance to the
white balance value for the highlighted
photograph.
P, S, A, and M Modes 107
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting (ADL)
settings slightly with each shot, “bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations
in which it is difficult to set exposure or white balance and there is not time to check
results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for
the same subject.
Option
k
Description
Vary exposure over a series of three photographs.
AE
bracketing
WB
m
bracketing
ADL
!
bracketing
1
Shot 1: unmodified
Shot 2: exposure reduced Shot 3: exposure increased
Each time the shutter is released, the camera creates three images, each with a
different white balance. Not available with image qualities of NEF (RAW).
Take one photo with Active D-Lighting off, and another at the current Active
D-Lighting setting.
Choose a bracketing option.
After pressing G to display the menus,
highlight Custom Setting e2 (Auto
bracketing set) and press 2.
G button
Highlight the desired bracketing type and
press J.
108 P, S, A, and M Modes
2
Display bracketing options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current bracketing setting and press J.
P button
3
Information display
Select a bracketing increment.
Highlight a bracketing increment and press
J. Choose from values between 0.3 and
2 EV (AE bracketing) or 1 to 3 (WB
bracketing), or select ADL (ADL bracketing).
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
AE bracketing: The camera will vary exposure
with each shot. The first shot will be taken at
the value currently selected for exposure compensation. The bracketing
increment will be subtracted from the current value in the second shot and
added in the third shot, “bracketing” the current value. The modified values are
reflected in the values shown for shutter speed and aperture.
WB bracketing: Each shot is processed to create three copies, one at the current
white balance setting, one with increased amber, and one with increased blue.
ADL bracketing: The first shot after bracketing is activated is taken with Active
D-Lighting off, the second at the current Active D-Lighting setting (0 94; if
Active D-Lighting is off, the second shot will be taken with Active D-Lighting set
to Auto).
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed release modes, shooting will
pause after each bracketing cycle. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the
bracketing sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in
the sequence when the camera is turned on.
P, S, A, and M Modes 109
A
The Bracketing Progress Indicator
During AE bracketing, a bar is removed from the bracketing
progress indicator with each shot (v > w > x).
During ADL bracketing, the setting that will be used for the next
shot is underlined in the information display.
A
Disabling Bracketing
To disable bracketing and resume normal shooting, select OFF in Step 3 on the previous
page. To cancel bracketing before all frames have been recorded, rotate the mode dial to a
setting other than P, S, A, or M.
A
Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture
(mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the
camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the
camera exposure system are exceeded.
110 P, S, A, and M Modes
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing
settings, including sharpening, contrast, brightness, saturation, and hue, among
compatible devices and software.
Selecting a Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
Option
Description
Recommended for most situations, this option uses standard processing for
Q Standard
balanced results.
A good choice for photographs that will later be extensively processed or
R Neutral
retouched, this option uses minimal processing for natural results.
Choose this option for photographs that emphasize primary colors. Pictures
S Vivid
are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
e Portrait
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel.
f Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
1
Display Picture Control options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current Picture Control and press J.
P button
2
Information display
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a Picture Control and press J.
P, S, A, and M Modes 111
Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 115) can be modified to suit the scene
or the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings using Quick
adjust, or make manual adjustments to individual settings.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Press G to display the menus, then
highlight Set Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2. Highlight the
desired Picture Control and press 2.
2
G button
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting
and press 4 or 2 to choose a value (0 113).
Repeat this step until all settings have been
adjusted, or select Quick adjust to choose a
preset combination of settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing
the O button.
3
Save changes and exit.
Press J.
Picture Controls that have been modified from default
settings are indicated by an asterisk (“*”).
112 P, S, A, and M Modes
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option
Quick adjust
Manual adjustments
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls) (non-monochrome only)
Sharpening
Description
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected Picture Control (note that
this resets all manual adjustments). Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust sharpening
automatically according to the type of scene.
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
Contrast
Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera adjust contrast
automatically.
Brightness
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in highlights or shadows.
Saturation
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust saturation
automatically according to the type of scene.
Hue
Adjust hue.
Filter effects
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs
(0 114).
Toning
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs (0 114).
D
“A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with exposure and the position of
the subject in the frame.
A
Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using
the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu (0 115) and can be saved to a
memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and compatible software
(0 117).
P, S, A, and M Modes 113
A
The Picture Control Grid
To display a grid showing saturation (non-monochrome controls
only) and contrast for the Picture Control selected in Step 2, press and
hold the X button.
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation
are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid, and lines appear
parallel to the axes of the grid.
A
Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu
indicates the previous value for the setting.
A
Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom picture controls are the same as those on which the
custom picture control was based.
A
Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs.
The following filter effects are available:
Option
Description
Y Yellow Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in
O Orange landscape photographs. Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red
R
Red more contrast than orange.
G Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those
produced by physical glass filters.
A
Toning (Monochrome Only)
Choose from B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue,
Red Purple. Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays saturation
options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation control is not
available when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
114 P, S, A, and M Modes
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom
Picture Controls.
1
Select Manage Picture Control.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Manage Picture Control in the
shooting menu and press 2.
G button
2
Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press 2.
3
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control and
press 2, or press J to proceed to step 5 to
save a copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further modification.
4
Edit the selected Picture Control.
See page 113 for more information. To
abandon any changes and start over from
default settings, press the O button. Press J
when settings are complete.
5
Select a destination.
Highlight a destination for the custom
Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
P, S, A, and M Modes 115
6
Name the Picture Control.
Keyboard
By default, new Picture Controls are named
area
by adding a two-digit number (assigned
Name area
automatically) to the name of the existing
Picture Control; to use the default name,
proceed to Step 7. To move the cursor in the name area, rotate the command
dial. To enter a letter, use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in
the keyboard area and press J. To delete the character at the current cursor
position, press the O button.
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any
characters after the nineteenth will be deleted.
7
Save changes and exit.
Press X to save changes and exit. The new
Picture Control will appear in the Picture
Control list.
A
Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time using the Rename option in the
Manage Picture Control menu.
A
Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected
custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed.
A
The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon
in the top right corner of the edit display.
116 P, S, A, and M Modes
Original Picture Control icon
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with
ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card
and loaded into the camera, or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can
be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and
then deleted when no longer needed.
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from the
memory card, or to delete custom Picture Controls
from the memory card, highlight Load/Save in the
Manage Picture Control menu and press 2. The
following options will be displayed:
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the
memory card to custom Picture Controls C-1
through C-9 on the camera and name them as
desired.
• Delete from card: Delete selected custom Picture
Controls from the memory card.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) from the camera to a selected
destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.
A
Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time. The
memory card can only be used to store user-created custom Picture Controls. The preset
Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card, renamed,
or deleted.
P, S, A, and M Modes 117
Live View
Framing Photographs in the Monitor
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the
monitor.
Live view switch
2
Position the focus point.
Position the focus point over your subject as
described on page 121.
Focus point
3
Focus.
Press the shutter-release button halfway. The
focus point will flash green while the camera
focuses. If the camera is able to focus, the focus
point will be displayed in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point
will flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point flashes
red; check focus in the monitor before shooting). Except in i and j modes,
exposure can be locked by pressing the A (L) button.
4
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down. The monitor turns off and the
memory card access lamp lights during
recording. Do not remove the battery or memory
card until recording is complete. When shooting is
Memory card access lamp
complete, the photograph will be displayed in
the monitor for a few seconds before the camera returns to live view mode. To
exit, rotate the live view switch.
118 Live View
Focusing in Live View
Follow the steps below to choose focus and AF-area modes and position the focus
point.
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus Mode)
The following focus modes are available in live view (note that full-time–servo AF is
not available in g, ', and ( modes):
Option
Description
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is
AF-S Single-servo AF
pressed halfway.
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously until shutterAF-F Full-time-servo AF release button is pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
MF Manual focus
Focus manually (0 125).
1
Display focus options.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current focus mode in the information
display and press J.
P button
2
Choose a focus option.
Highlight an option and press J.
Live View 119
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Picks the Area (AF-Area Mode)
In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes can be selected in
live view (note that subject-tracking AF is not available in %, g, ', and 3 modes):
Option
6
7
8
9
1
Description
Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects and focuses
Face-priority AF
on portrait subjects.
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-portrait
Wide-area AF
subjects. Use the multi selector to select the focus point.
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the frame. A tripod is
Normal-area AF
recommended.
Subject-tracking AF Use if you want focus to track a selected subject.
Display AF-area modes.
Press the P button, then highlight the
current AF-area mode in the information
display and press J.
P button
2
Choose an AF-area mode.
Highlight an option and press J.
120 Live View
3
Choose the focus point.
6 (face-priority AF): A double yellow border will be
displayed when the camera detects a portrait
subject (if multiple faces, up to a maximum of 35,
are detected, the camera will focus on the closest
subject; to choose a different subject, use the
multi selector). If the camera can no longer
detect the subject (because, for example, the
subject has turned to face away from the camera),
the border will no longer be displayed.
Focus point
7/8 (wide- and normal-area AF): Use the multi
selector to move the focus point anywhere in the
frame, or press J to position the focus point in
the center of the frame.
Focus point
9 (subject-tracking AF): Position the focus point
over your subject and press J. The focus point
will track the selected subject as it moves through
the frame. To end focus tracking, press J a
second time.
Focus point
Live View 121
The Live View Display
u
io
q
w
e
r
!0
!1
!2
t
y
!3
Item
Description
0
19, 30,
37, 82
—
q Shooting mode
The mode currently selected with the mode dial.
w “No movie” icon
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.
The amount of time remaining before live view ends
124, 129
automatically. Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less.
e Time remaining
r
Microphone
sensitivity
t Sound level
y
u
i
o
!0
!1
Wind noise
reduction
Manual movie
settings indicator
Focus mode
AF-area mode
Movie frame size
Time remaining
(movie mode)
!2 Focus point
!3 Exposure indicator
Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed in red if level is
too high; adjust microphone sensitivity accordingly.
Displayed when On is selected for Movie settings > Wind
noise reduction in the shooting menu.
Displayed when On is selected for Manual movie settings
in mode M.
The current focus mode.
The current AF-area mode.
The frame size of movies recorded in movie mode.
The recording time remaining in movie mode.
The current focus point. The display varies with the option
selected for AF-area mode (0 120).
Indicates whether the photograph would be under- or overexposed at current settings (mode M only).
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
122 Live View
128
128
128
129
119
120
128
126
121
87
A
Live View/Movie Recording Display Options
Press the R button to cycle through display options as shown below.
Circled areas indicate edges of movie frame crop.
R button
Show detailed
photo indicators
Show movie indicators
(0 128) *
Show basic photo
indicators *
Hide indicators*
Framing grid*
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie recording when frame sizes
other than 640 × 424 are selected for Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the
shooting menu (0 128; the area outside the movie frame crop is grayed out when movie
indicators are displayed).
A
Camera Settings
Except when movie indicators are displayed, you can
access the following live view photography settings
by pressing the P button: image quality (0 59), image
size (0 61), bracketing increment (0 109), HDR
(0 96), Active D-Lighting (0 94), white balance
(0 101), ISO sensitivity (0 67), Picture Controls
P button
(0 111), focus mode (0 119), AF-area mode (0 120),
metering (0 90), flash mode (0 63, 65), flash
compensation (0 93), and exposure compensation
(0 92). When movie indicators are displayed, movie
settings can be adjusted (0 122).
Live View 123
A
Exposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live
view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display, producing
photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor (note that exposure
compensation can only be previewed in the monitor at values between +3 EV and –3 EV). To
prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, remove the rubber
eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap before shooting (0 50).
A
HDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera monitor will remain on
and the video device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports HDMICEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the setup menu (0 166) before
shooting in live view.
D
Shooting in Live View Mode
Although they will not appear in the final picture, distortion may be visible in the monitor if
the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame. Bright
light sources may leave after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright
spots may also appear. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent,
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using Flicker reduction (0 200), although
they may still be visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting in
live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Live view ends automatically when the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does not end
live view on televisions or other external displays).
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live
view when the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal
circuits may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this
does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view, wait for the internal circuits to
cool and then try again.
D
The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (0 122; the timer
turns red 5 s before the auto off timer expires (0 186) or if live view is about to end to protect
the internal circuits). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately
when live view is selected.
124 Live View
D
Using Autofocus in Live View
Autofocus is slower in live view and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera
focuses. The camera may be unable to focus in the situations listed below (note that the
focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus):
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, or the
subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in
brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-vapor, or similar
lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds or a row of windows
in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
In addition, the subject-tracking AF may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly,
leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or brightness,
or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the
background.
A
Manual Focus
To focus in manual focus mode (0 57), rotate the
lens focus ring until the subject is in focus.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 8.3 ×
for precise focus, press the X button. While the view
through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation window
will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner
of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to areas
of the frame not visible in the monitor (available only
X button
if 7 (Wide-area AF) or 8 (Normal-area AF) is
selected for AF-area mode), or press W (Q) to zoom
out.
Navigation window
Live View 125
Recording and Viewing Movies
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.
1
Rotate the live view switch.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon (0 122) indicates that movies can not be recorded.
A
Before Recording
Set aperture before recording in mode A or M (0 86, 87).
2
Live view switch
Focus.
Frame the opening shot and focus as described in Steps 2
and 3 of “Framing Photographs in the Monitor” (0 118;
see also “Focusing in Live View” on pages 0 119–121).
Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in
face-priority AF drops during movie recording.
3
Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start recording. A
recording indicator and the time available are displayed in
the monitor. Except in i and j modes, exposure can be
locked by pressing the A (L) button (0 91) or (in modes
P, S, A, and %) altered by up to ±3 EV in steps of 1/3 EV by
pressing the E (N) button and rotating the command dial
(0 92; note that depending on the brightness of the
subject, changes to exposure may have no visible effect).
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
126 Recording and Viewing Movies
4
End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to end recording. Recording will end
automatically when the maximum length is reached, the memory card is full,
another mode is selected, or the monitor is closed (closing the monitor does
not end recording on televisions or other external displays).
A
Taking Photographs During Movie Recording
To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press the shutter-release
button all the way down and hold it in this position until the shutter is released.
A
Maximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum recording times, see
page 128); note that depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end before this
length is reached (0 238).
D
Recording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an
object moves at high speed through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using
Flicker reduction; 0 200). Bright light sources may leave after-images when the camera is
panned. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots may also appear. Bright
bands may appear in some areas of the frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or
other bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at
the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the microphone during
recording. Note that the built-in microphone may record lens noise during autofocus and
vibration reduction.
Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits; exit live
view when the camera is not in use. Note that the temperature of the camera’s internal
circuits may rise and noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be
displayed in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but this
does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view or movie recording, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected. Shutter speed and ISO
sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On is selected for Manual movie settings
(0 129) and the camera is in mode M.
Recording and Viewing Movies 127
Movie Settings
The camera offers the following movie settings.
• Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following options. The
frame rate depends on the option currently selected for Video mode in the setup
menu (0 202):
L/t
M/u
N/r
O/s
P/k
Q/l
R/o
S/n
T/p
Frame size/frame rate
Frame size (pixels)
Frame rate 1
60p 2
50p 3
1920 × 1080
30p 2
25p 3
24p
60p 2
1280 × 720
50p 3
30p 2
640 × 424
25p 3
Maximum length (high movie quality ★/
normal movie quality) 4
10 min./20 min.
20 min./29 min. 59 s
29 min. 59 s/
29 min. 59 s
1 Listed value. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and
23.976 fps respectively.
2 Available when NTSC is selected for Video mode (0 202).
3 Available when PAL is selected for Video mode.
4 Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.
• Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional ME-1 stereo microphones (0 129, 237)
on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust
sensitivity automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to select
microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a
sensitivity.
• Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter for the built-in
microphone (optional stereo microphones are unaffected; 0 129, 237), reducing
noise produced by wind blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds
may also be affected).
A
The Live View Display
The movie crop can be viewed during live view by
pressing the R button to select the “show movie
indicators”, “hide indicators”, “framing grid”, or “show
basic photo indicators” display (0 123). When movie
indicators are displayed, you can access the following
movie settings by pressing the P button: movie frame P button
size/quality, microphone sensitivity, white balance
(0 101), ISO sensitivity (0 67), Picture Controls
(0 111), focus mode (0 119), AF-area mode (0 120),
and exposure compensation (0 92).
128 Recording and Viewing Movies
• Manual movie settings: Choose On to allow manual
adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the
camera is in mode M. Shutter speed can be set to values as
fast as 1/4000 s; the slowest speed available varies with the
frame rate: 1/30 s for frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p, 1/50 s for
50p, and 1/60 s for 60p. ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and Hi
1 (0 67). If shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are not in these ranges when live view
starts, they will automatically be set to supported values, and remain at these
values when live view ends. Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected;
the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically when On is selected for
ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu
(0 180).
1
Select Movie settings.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Movie settings in the shooting
menu and press 2.
G button
2
Choose movie options.
Highlight the desired item and press 2, then
highlight an option and press J.
A
Using an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to reduce noise caused by lens vibration
being recorded during autofocus.
D
The Count-Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically (0 122). Depending
on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins.
Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still end
automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming
movie recording.
A
HDMI and Other Video Devices
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera monitor will remain on
and the video device will display the view through the lens. If the device supports
HDMI-CEC, select Off for the HDMI > Device control option in the setup menu (0 166)
before shooting in live view.
Recording and Viewing Movies 129
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 135). Press J to start
playback; your current position is indicated by the movie progress bar.
1 icon
Length
Current position/total length
Volume
Movie progress bar
Guide
The following operations can be performed:
To
Pause
Play
Use
Description
Pause playback.
Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind/
advance.
Advance/
rewind
Speed increases with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×;
keep pressed to skip to beginning or end of movie (first frame is
indicated by h in top right corner of monitor, last frame by i).
If playback is paused, movie rewinds or advances one frame at
a time; hold for continuous rewind or advance.
Skip 10 s
Rotate the command dial to skip ahead or back 10 s.
Adjust volume
Return to fullframe playback
X/W (Q) Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.
/K Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
130 Recording and Viewing Movies
Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills.
Option
f Choose start/end point
g Save selected frame
Description
Create a copy from which the opening or closing footage has
been removed.
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1
Display a movie full frame.
2
Pause the movie on the new opening
or closing frame.
Play the movie back as described on page
130, pressing J to start and resume
playback and 3 to pause. Pause playback
when you reach the new opening or closing
frame.
3
Movie progress bar
Select Choose start/end point.
Press the P button, then highlight Choose
start/end point and press 2.
P button
Recording and Viewing Movies 131
4
Choose the current frame as the new
start or end point.
To create a copy that begins from the current
frame, highlight Start point and press J.
The frames before the current frame will be
removed when you save the copy.
Start point
To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End point and press
J. The frames after the current frame will be removed when you save the copy.
End point
5
Confirm the new start or end point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate
the command dial).
6
Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
7
Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight Preview and
press J. To abandon the current copy and
return to Step 5, highlight Cancel and press
J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 8.
132 Recording and Viewing Movies
8
Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press J to
save the copy to a new file. To replace the
original movie file with the edited copy,
highlight Overwrite existing file and press
J.
D
Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient
space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A
Choosing the Role of the Current Frame
To make the frame displayed in Step 5 the new end
point (x) instead of the new start point (w) or vice
versa, press the A (L) button.
A (L) button
Recording and Viewing Movies 133
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1
Pause the movie on the desired frame.
Play the movie back as described on page
130, pressing J to start and resume
playback and 3 to pause. Pause the movie
at the frame you intend to copy.
2
Choose Save selected frame.
Press the P button, then highlight Save
selected frame and press 2.
P button
3
Create a still copy.
Press 1 to create a still copy of the current
frame.
4
Save the copy.
Highlight Yes and press J to create a finequality (0 59) JPEG copy of the selected
frame.
A
Save Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched. JPEG
movie stills lack some categories of photo information (0 136).
134 Recording and Viewing Movies
Playback and Deletion
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K button.
The most recent photograph will be displayed in
the monitor.
K button
To
Use
Description
View additional
photographs
Press 2 to view photographs in order recorded, 4 to view
photographs in reverse order.
View additional
photo info
Change photo info displayed (0 136).
W (Q)
View thumbnails
Zoom in on
photograph
X
Delete images
O
Change protect
status
A (L)
Play movie
See page 140 for more information on the thumbnail
display.
See page 142 for more information on playback zoom.
Confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O again to
delete photo.
To protect image, or to remove protection from protected
image, press A (L) button (0 143).
If current picture is marked with 1 icon to show that it is a
movie, pressing J starts movie playback (0 130).
A
The P Button
Pressing the P button in full-frame, thumbnail, or
calendar playback displays the dialog shown at right,
where you can rate pictures (0 144), retouch photos
and edit movies (0 131, 205), and select pictures for
transfer to a smart device (0 173).
P button
Playback and Deletion 135
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-frame playback.
Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below. Note that “image
only”, shooting data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback display options (0 176).
Location data are only displayed if location data were embedded in the picture when
it was taken (0 74).
File information
None (image only)
Highlights
Overview
RGB histogram
Location data
Shooting data
❚❚ File Information
1 2 3
4
5
6
11
10
8
9
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Protect status ........................................................... 143
Retouch indicator................................................... 206
Upload marking...................................................... 173
Frame number/total number of images
File name ................................................................... 189
Image quality..............................................................59
Image size ....................................................................61
Time of recording ............................................ 15, 201
Date of recording ............................................ 15, 201
Folder name ............................................................. 178
Rating ......................................................................... 144
1
2
3
4
5
6
Protect status ........................................................... 143
Retouch indicator................................................... 206
Upload marking...................................................... 173
Frame number/total number of images
Image highlights
Rating ......................................................................... 144
❚❚ Highlights *
1 2 3
5
4
6
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).
136 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ RGB Histogram
1
2
1 Frame number/total number of images
2 Histogram (RGB channel). In all histograms,
3
4
10
9
8
5
7
3
4
5
6
7
6
8
9
10
horizontal axis gives pixel brightness, vertical
axis number of pixels.
Histogram (red channel)
Histogram (green channel)
Histogram (blue channel)
Upload marking ......................................................173
White balance ..........................................................101
White balance fine-tuning ...............................103
Preset manual.......................................................104
Retouch indicator ...................................................206
Protect status ...........................................................143
Rating..........................................................................144
A
Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is
displayed, press X. Use the X and W (Q) buttons to zoom
in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The
histogram will be updated to show only the data for the
portion of the image visible in the monitor.
A
Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in
imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below:
If the image contains objects with a wide range of
brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively
even.
If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to
the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to
see photographs in the monitor.
Playback and Deletion 137
❚❚ Shooting Data
5 Shooting mode .....................................19, 30, 37, 82
1 2 3
15
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
25
26
27
28
20
21
22
23
29
24
1
2
3
4
Protect status ...........................................................143
Retouch indicator...................................................206
Upload marking ......................................................173
Metering ...................................................................... 90
Shutter speed............................................................. 83
Aperture....................................................................... 83
25
26
27
28
29
ISO sensitivity 1 .......................................................... 67
Exposure compensation ........................................ 92
Focal length.............................................................. 231
Lens data
Focus mode ....................................................... 51, 119
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 2 .................. 18, 181
Flash type .........................................................192, 232
Commander mode 2
Flash mode .......................................................... 63, 65
Flash control............................................................. 192
Flash compensation ................................................ 93
Rating.......................................................................... 144
Camera name
Frame number/total number of images
White balance .......................................................... 101
White balance fine-tuning...............................103
Preset manual....................................................... 104
Color space ............................................................... 179
Picture Control......................................................... 111
Quick adjust 3 ........................................................... 113
Original Picture Control 3 ..................................... 111
Sharpening ............................................................... 113
Contrast...................................................................... 113
Brightness ................................................................. 113
Saturation 3 ............................................................... 113
Filter effects 3 ............................................................ 113
Hue 3 ............................................................................ 113
Toning 3 ...................................................................... 113
High ISO noise reduction..................................... 180
Long exposure noise reduction ........................ 179
Active D-Lighting ..................................................... 94
HDR (high dynamic range).................................... 96
Retouch history....................................................... 205
Image comment ..................................................... 202
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
3 May not be displayed depending on Picture Control used.
138 Playback and Deletion
❚❚ Overview Data
1
2
3
4
5
14 15
16
17
18
19
6
13
20
21
28
27
26
7
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
11
10
9
25 24
23
22
8
Frame number/total number of images
Protect status........................................................... 143
Camera name
Retouch indicator................................................... 206
Upload marking...................................................... 173
Histogram showing the distribution of tones in
the image (0 137).
Image quality..............................................................59
Image size ....................................................................61
File name................................................................... 189
Time of recording............................................ 15, 201
Date of recording ............................................ 15, 201
Folder name ............................................................. 178
Rating ......................................................................... 144
Metering.......................................................................90
Shooting mode.....................................19, 30, 37, 82
Shutter speed .............................................................83
Aperture .......................................................................83
ISO sensitivity 1 ...........................................................67
Focal length ............................................................. 231
Location data indicator...........................................74
Image comment indicator .................................. 202
Active D-Lighting ......................................................94
Picture Control ........................................................ 111
Color space............................................................... 179
Flash mode ..................................................................63
White balance.......................................................... 101
White balance fine-tuning.................................. 103
Preset manual.......................................................... 104
27 Flash compensation.................................................93
Commander mode 2
28 Exposure compensation.........................................92
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this function.
❚❚ Location Data
Location data are displayed only if location data were embedded in the picture when
it was taken (0 74). In the case of movies, the data give the location at the start of
recording.
1 2 3
10
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Protect status........................................................... 143
Retouch indicator .................................................. 206
Upload marking...................................................... 173
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
Rating ......................................................................... 144
Camera name
Frame number/total number of images
Playback and Deletion 139
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of 4, 12, or 80 images, press the W (Q) button.
W (Q)
W (Q)
X
Full-frame
playback
To
Display more
images
Display fewer
images
X
Thumbnail playback
Use
W (Q)
X
Calendar
playback
Description
Press W (Q) button to increase the number of images
displayed.
Press X button to reduce the number of images displayed.
When four images are displayed, press to view highlighted
image full frame.
Highlight images
Use multi selector or command dial to highlight pictures.
View highlighted
image
Press J to display the highlighted image full frame.
Delete
highlighted
photo
Change protect
status of
highlighted
photo
O
See page 146 for more information.
A (L)
See page 143 for more information.
140 Playback and Deletion
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button when 80 images are
displayed.
Thumbnail list
W (Q)
W (Q)
X
X
Date list
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Calendar
playback
The operations that can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date
list or the thumbnail list:
To
Use
W (Q)
Toggle between date
list and thumbnail list
Exit to thumbnail
playback/Zoom in on
highlighted photo
X
Description
Press W (Q) or J button in date list to place cursor in
thumbnail list. Press W (Q) again to return to date list.
• Date list: Exit to 80-frame playback.
• Thumbnail list: Press and hold X button to zoom in on
highlighted picture.
Highlight dates/
Highlight images
• Date list: Highlight date.
• Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.
Toggle full frame
playback
• Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.
Delete highlighted
photo(s)
Change protect
status of highlighted
photo
O
A (L)
• Date list: Delete all pictures taken on selected date.
• Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture (0 146).
See page 143 for more information.
Playback and Deletion 141
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the
image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback. The following
operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:
To
Zoom in or out
View other
areas of image
Select/zoom in
on or out from
faces
Use
Description
Press X to zoom in to maximum of
approximately 33× (large images), 25×
X / W (Q) (medium images) or 13× (small
images). Press W (Q) to zoom out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of image not
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly
to other areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when
zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor is
indicated by yellow border.
Faces (up to 35) detected during zoom
are indicated by white borders in
navigation window. Press P and use
the multi selector to view other faces,
P
or press J to zoom in on the currently
selected face. Press P again to return to
normal zoom.
Rotate command dial to view same location in other images at
current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a
movie is displayed.
View other
images
Cancel zoom
Change protect
status
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame playback.
A (L)
142 Playback and Deletion
See page 143 for more information.
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the A (L) button can be
used to protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be
deleted using the O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 196).
To protect a photograph:
1
Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.
Full-frame playback
2
Thumbnail playback
Press the A (L) button.
The photograph will be marked with a P
icon.
A (L) button
A
Removing Protection
To remove protection from individual pictures so that they can be deleted, display pictures
full-frame or highlight them in the thumbnail list and then press the A (L) button. To
remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback
folder menu (0 175), press the A (L) and O buttons together for about two seconds
during playback.
Playback and Deletion 143
Rating Pictures
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion. Rating is not available
with protected images.
Rating Individual Pictures
1
Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the
thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback.
2
Display playback options.
Press the P button to display playback
options.
P button
3
Select Rating.
Highlight Rating and press J.
4
Choose a rating.
Press 4 or 2 to choose a rating of from zero
to five stars, or select ) to mark the picture
as a candidate for later deletion.
5
Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
144 Playback and Deletion
Rating Multiple Pictures
Use the Rating option in the playback menu to rate multiple pictures.
1
Select Rating.
Press the G button to display the camera
menus, then highlight Rating in the
playback menu and press 2.
G button
2
Rate pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight pictures (to view
the currently highlighted picture full frame,
press and hold the X button) and press 1 or
3 to choose a rating of from zero to five
stars, or select ) to mark the picture as a
candidate for later deletion.
3
Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
Playback and Deletion 145
Deleting Photographs
Unprotected photographs can be deleted as described below. Once deleted,
photographs can not be recovered.
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback
1
Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar
playback.
2
Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
Full-frame playback
3
Thumbnail playback
Press the O button again.
To delete the photograph, press the O
button again. To exit without deleting the
photograph, press the K button.
A
Calendar Playback
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by
highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O button (0 141).
146 Playback and Deletion
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that
depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Q Selected
Delete selected pictures.
n Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.
R All
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback (0 175).
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1
Select Delete.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Delete in the playback menu and
press 2.
G button
2
Choose Selected.
Highlight Selected and press 2.
3
Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to highlight a picture
(to view the highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button).
4
Select the highlighted picture.
Press the W (Q) button to select the
highlighted picture. Selected pictures are
marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to
select additional pictures; to deselect a
W (Q) button
picture, highlight it and press W (Q).
5
Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
Playback and Deletion 147
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date
1
Choose Select Date.
In the delete menu, highlight Select date
and press 2.
2
Highlight a date.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a date.
To view the pictures taken on the
highlighted date, press W (Q). Use the multi
selector to scroll through the pictures, or
press and hold X to view the current picture
full screen. Press W (Q) to return to the date
W (Q) button
list.
3
Select the highlighted date.
Press 2 to select all pictures taken on the
highlighted date. Selected dates are
indicated by check marks. Repeat steps 2
and 3 to select additional dates; to deselect a
date, highlight it and press 2.
4
Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
148 Playback and Deletion
Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a slide show of the
pictures in the current playback folder (0 175).
1
Select Slide show.
To display the slide show menu, press the
G button and select Slide show in the
playback menu.
G button
2
Start the slide show.
Highlight Start in the slide show menu and
press J.
The following operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:
To
Skip back/skip ahead
Use
Description
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip
to next frame.
View additional photo info
Change photo info displayed (0 136).
Pause/resume slide show
Pause show. Press again to resume.
Raise/lower volume
Exit to playback mode
Press X during movie playback to increase
X / W (Q) volume, W (Q) to decrease.
End show and return to playback mode.
K
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends.
Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu.
Playback and Deletion 149
Slide Show Options
Before starting a slide show, you can use the options in the slide show menu to select
the images displayed by type or rating and choose how long each image is displayed.
• Image type: Choose from Still images and movies, Still
images only, Movies only, and By rating. To include only
pictures with selected ratings, highlight By rating and press
2. A list of ratings will be displayed; highlight ratings and
press 2 to select or deselect pictures with the highlighted
rating for inclusion in the slide show. Selected ratings are
indicated by a check mark. Press J to exit when the desired
ratings are selected.
• Frame interval: Choose how long still images are displayed.
150 Playback and Deletion
Connections
Installing ViewNX 2
Install the supplied software to display and
edit photographs and movies that have
been copied to your computer. Before
installing ViewNX 2, confirm that your
computer meets the system requirements
on page 152. Be sure to use the latest
version of ViewNX 2, which is available for
download from the websites listed on page
xiv, as earlier versions that do not support
the D5300 may fail to transfer NEF (RAW)
images correctly.
1
Launch the installer.
ViewNX 2TM
Your Imaging Toolbox
q Select region (if required)
Start the computer, insert the installer
CD, and launch the installer. A
language selection dialog will be
displayed. If the desired language is
not available, click Region Selection
to choose a different region (region
selection is not available in the
European release).
2
w Select
language
e Click
Next
Start the installer.
Click Install and follow the on-screen instructions.
Click Install
Connections 151
3
4
A
Exit the installer.
Windows
Mac OS
Click Yes
Click OK
Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
System Requirements
Windows
Mac OS
• Photos: Intel Celeron, Pentium 4, Core Series;
• Photos: Intel Core or Xeon series
1.6 GHz or better
• Movies (playback): Core Duo 2 GHz or better;
• Movies (playback): 3.0 GHz or better
Intel Core i5 or better recommended when
Pentium D; Intel Core i5 or better
viewing movies with a frame size of
CPU
recommended when viewing movies with
1280×720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps
a frame size of 1280×720 or more at a
or above or movies with a frame size of
frame rate of 30 fps or above or movies
1920×1080 or more
with a frame size of 1920×1080 or more
• Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or better
• Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or better
Pre-installed versions of Windows 8,
Windows 7, Windows Vista, and Windows XP;
OS
OS X 10.8 or 10.7, Mac OS X 10.6
note that 64-bit versions of Windows XP are
not supported
• 32-bit Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:
1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
• OS X 10.8, 10.7: 2 GB or more (4 GB or more
Memory • 64-bit Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista:
recommended)
• Mac OS X 10.6: 1 GB or more (4 GB or more
(RAM)
2 GB or more (4 GB or more recommended)
• Windows XP: 512 MB or more (2 GB or more
recommended)
recommended)
Hard disk
A minimum of 1 GB available on the startup disk (3 GB or more recommended)
space
Resolution: 1024×768 pixels (XGA) or more
Resolution: 1024×768 pixels (XGA) or more
Graphics (1280×1024 pixels or more recommended)
(1280×1024 pixels or more recommended)
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or more
Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors) or more
See the websites listed on page xiv for the latest information on supported operating systems.
152 Connections
Using ViewNX 2
Copy Pictures to the Computer
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on the supplied ViewNX 2
CD (0 151).
1
Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted,
connect the supplied USB cable as shown and then turn the camera on.
A
Use a Reliable Power Source
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully
charged.
A
Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables. Do
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Close the connector
cover when the connector is not in use.
A
USB Hubs
Transfer may not proceed as expected if the camera is connected via a USB hub or
keyboard.
2
Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select
Nikon Transfer 2.
A
Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as described below.
1 Under Import pictures and videos, click
Change program. A program selection dialog
will be displayed; select Import File using
Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.
2 Double-click Import File.
Connections 153
3
Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, pictures on the memory
card will be copied to the computer.
A
During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the
USB cable while transfer is in progress.
Start Transfer
4
Terminate the connection.
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable.
View Pictures
Pictures are displayed in ViewNX 2 when transfer is
complete.
A
Starting ViewNX 2 Manually
• Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on
the desktop.
• Mac OS: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.
❚❚ Retouching Photographs
To crop pictures and perform such tasks as adjusting sharpness
and tone levels, click the Edit button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
❚❚ Editing Movies
To perform such tasks as trimming unwanted footage from
movies shot with the camera, click the Movie Editor button in
the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
❚❚ Printing Pictures
Click the Print button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar. A dialog will be
displayed, allowing you to print pictures on a printer connected
to the computer.
❚❚ Viewing Location Data
To view the locations where pictures were taken or display track
logs, click the Map button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.
154 Connections
A
For More Information
Consult online help for more information on using
ViewNX 2.
A
Viewing the Nikon Website
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All Programs > Link to Nikon
from the Windows start menu (Internet connection required).
Connections 155
Printing Photographs
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer (0 265) connected
directly to the camera.
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or
attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
3
Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed by a PictBridge
playback display.
D
Selecting Photographs for Printing
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 59) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu
(0 213).
156 Connections
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1
Select a picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X
button to zoom in on the current frame (0 142; press K to
exit zoom). To view eight pictures at a time, press the
W (Q) button. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures,
or press X to display the highlighted picture full frame.
2
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
3
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Highlight a page size (only sizes supported by the current printer are listed)
Page size and press J to select and exit to the previous menu (to print at the default
page size for the current printer, select Printer default).
No. of Press 1 or 3 to choose number of copies (maximum 99), then press J to
copies select and return to the previous menu.
This option is available only if supported by the printer. Highlight Printer
default (use current printer settings), Print with border (print photo with
Border
white border), or No border and press J to select and exit to the previous
menu.
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings), Print time stamp
Time
(print times and dates of recording on photos), or No time stamp and press J
stamp
to select and exit to the previous menu.
This option is available only if supported by the printer. To exit without
cropping, highlight No cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,
highlight Crop and press 2.
Cropping
A crop selection dialog will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the
crop, W (Q) to decrease. Position the crop using the multi selector and press
J. Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.
Connections 157
4
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.
D
Date Imprint
If you select Print time stamp in the PictBridge menu when printing photographs
containing date information recorded using Custom Setting d6 (Print date; 0 190), the date
will appear twice. The imprinted date may however be cropped out if the photographs are
cropped or printed without a border.
158 Connections
Printing Multiple Pictures
1
Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display
(see Step 3 on page 156).
G button
2
Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures for printing.
• Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a
selected date.
• Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the DPOF print order
option in the playback menu (0 162). The current print order will be
displayed in Step 3.
• Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card,
proceed to Step 4. Note that if the memory card contains more than 256
pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
Connections 159
3
Select pictures or choose a date.
If you chose Print select or Print (DPOF) in Step 2, press 4 or
2 to scroll through the pictures on the memory card. To
display the current picture full screen, press and hold the X
button. To select the current picture for printing, press 1.
The picture will be marked with a Z icon and the number
of prints will be set to 1; press 1 or 3 to specify the
number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3
when the number of prints is 1).
X button: View photo full
screen
If you chose Select date in Step 2, press 1 or 3 to highlight a
date and press 2 to toggle the highlighted date on or off.
To view the pictures taken on the selected date, press W
(Q). Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures, or
X button: View highlighted
press and hold X to view the current picture full screen.
photo full screen
Press W (Q) again to return to the date selection dialog.
W (Q) button: View
photos for selected date
160 Connections
4
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
5
Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as described on page 157 (a
warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small for an index
print).
6
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To
cancel before all copies have been printed, press J.
Connections 161
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to create digital “print
orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and devices that support DPOF.
1
Choose Select/set for the DPOF print
order item in the playback menu.
Press the G button and select DPOF print
order in the playback menu. Highlight
Select/set and press 2 (to remove all
G button
photographs from the print order, select
Deselect all).
2
Select pictures.
Press 4 or 2 to scroll through the pictures
on the memory card. To display the current
picture full screen, press and hold the X
button. To select the current picture for
printing, press 1. The picture will be marked
with a Z icon and the number of prints will
be set to 1; press 1 or 3 to specify the
number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the
picture, press 3 when the number of prints
is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures
have been selected.
X button: View photo full screen
3
Display imprint options.
Press J to display data imprint options.
162 Connections
4
Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and press 2
to toggle the highlighted option on or off (to
complete the print order without including
this information, proceed to Step 5).
• Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print
order.
• Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print order.
5
Complete the print order.
Press J to complete the print order.
D
DPOF Print Order
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer, select
Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to
modify and print the current order (0 159). DPOF print date and shooting data options are
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp option.
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory
card to store the print order.
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 59) can not be selected using this option. JPEG copies of NEF
(RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu
(0 213).
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device
after the print order is created.
Connections 163
Viewing Pictures on TV
The supplied audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the camera to a
television or video recorder for playback or recording. A High-Definition Multimedia
Interface (HDMI) cable (available separately from third-party suppliers) with a mini
HDMI connector (Type C) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video
devices.
Standard Definition Devices
Before connecting the camera to a standard television, confirm that the camera
video standard (0 202) matches that used in the TV.
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A/V cable.
2
Connect the A/V cable as shown.
Audio (red)
Audio (white)
Video (yellow)
Connect to camera
Connect to video device
3
Tune the television to the video channel.
4
Turn the camera on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be displayed on the television screen. Note that
the edges of images may not be displayed.
A
Video Mode
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and that the option
selected for Video mode (0 202) matches the video standard used in the TV.
A
Television Playback
Use of an AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended playback.
164 Connections
High-Definition Devices
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a third-party HDMI cable with a
mini HDMI connector (Type C).
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2
Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to camera
Connect to high-definition device
(choose cable with connector for HDMI device)
3
Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4
Turn the camera on and press the K button.
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-definition television or
monitor screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.
A
Playback Volume
Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls can not be used.
Connections 165
❚❚ Choosing an Output Resolution
To choose the format for images output to the HDMI device,
select HDMI > Output resolution in the camera setup menu
(0 195). If Auto is selected, the camera will automatically select
the appropriate format.
❚❚ Controlling the Camera with the TV Remote
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup menu (0 195) when the
camera is connected to a television that supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera
and television are on, the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi
selector and J button during full-frame playback and slide shows. If Off is selected,
the television remote can not be used to control the camera, but the camera can be
used to shoot photographs and movies in live view.
A
HDMI-CEC Devices
HDMI-CEC (High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer Electronics Control) is a
standard that allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which they are
connected. When the camera is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the
viewfinder in place of the number of exposures remaining.
A
1920 × 1080 60p/50p
Selecting 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p for Movie settings > Frame size/frame
rate may cause variations in the resolution and frame rate of the data output to HDMI
devices during recording. During playback (0 130), HDMI devices will display the movie
only; indicators will not be displayed.
D
HDMI > Output Resolution
Movies can not be output at resolutions of 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p. Some
devices may not support an Output resolution setting of Auto; in this case, select 1080i
(interlaced).
166 Connections
Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
Install the Wireless Mobile Utility app on your Android and iOS device to display the
view through the camera lens on the smart device, take pictures and control the
camera remotely, and download pictures from the camera for sharing via the
Internet.
Download pictures
Share pictures
Remote control
See the Wireless Mobile Utility manual for details (0 168).
Wi-Fi 167
Accessing the Camera
Before connecting via Wi-Fi (wireless LAN), install the Wireless Mobile Utility on your
Android or iOS smart device. Instructions for accessing the camera vary with the type
of connection used by the smart device.
Android
• Push-button WPS: If the smart device supports push-button WPS (i.e., has a WPS
button connection option in its Wi-Fi settings menu), you can use this easy
method to connect to the smart device (0 169)
• PIN-entry WPS: If the smart device supports WPS, you can use the camera to establish
a connection by entering the PIN displayed by the smart device (0 170)
• View SSID: If the smart device does not support WPS, you can connect by selecting
the camera SSID on the smart device (0 171)
iOS
• View SSID: Connect by selecting the camera SSID on the smart device (0 171)
A
Installing the App
1 Find the app.
On the smart device, connect to the Google Play service, the App Store, or another app
marketplace and search for “Wireless Mobile Utility”. For more information, see the
instructions provided with the smart device.
2 Install the app.
Read the app description and install the app. A pdf manual for the Wireless Mobile Utility
is available for download at the following URLs:
• Android: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU/
• iOS: http://nikonimglib.com/ManDL/WMAU-ios/
A
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard designed to make it easy to establish a secure
wireless network. For information on the steps involved and the length of time the smart
device will wait for a connection, see the documentation supplied with the smart device.
168 Wi-Fi
WPS (Android Only)
1
Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Press the G button to display the menus,
then highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2. Highlight Network connection
and press 2, then highlight Enable and
G button
press J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to
activate.
2
Connect.
Enable WPS button connections on the camera and smart device:
• Camera: Highlight Network settings and
press 2.
Highlight Push-button WPS and press 2
to ready the camera for a WPS connection.
The camera will wait about two minutes
for a WPS connection request from the
smart device. To extend the wait time,
press J.
• Smart device: Select Wi-Fi settings > WPS button connection.
3
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be
displayed.
Wi-Fi 169
PIN Entry (Android Only)
1
Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Press the G button to display the menus,
then highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2. Highlight Network connection
and press 2, then highlight Enable and
G button
press J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to
activate.
2
Select Network settings > PIN-entry WPS.
Highlight Network settings and press 2.
Highlight PIN-entry WPS and press 2.
3
Enter the PIN.
Enter the PIN displayed by the smart device. Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits
and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J when entry is complete.
4
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be
displayed.
170 Wi-Fi
SSID (Android and iOS)
1
Enable the camera’s built-in Wi-Fi.
Press the G button to display the menus,
then highlight Wi-Fi in the setup menu and
press 2. Highlight Network connection
and press 2, then highlight Enable and
G button
press J. Wait a few seconds for Wi-Fi to
activate.
2
Display the camera SSID.
Highlight Network settings and press 2.
Highlight View SSID and press 2.
3
Select the camera SSID.
Select the camera SSID in the list of networks displayed by the smart device.
4
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility.
Launch the Wireless Mobile Utility on the smart device. The main dialog will be
displayed.
Wi-Fi 171
❚❚ Terminating the Connection
Wi-Fi can be disabled by:
• Selecting Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the camera setup menu
• Starting movie recording
• Turning the camera off
❚❚ Restoring Default Settings
To restore default network settings, select Wi-Fi > Network settings > Reset
network settings. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press
J to restore default network settings.
A
The Wi-Fi Display
While Wi-Fi is enabled, a c icon will flash in the information display.
The icon will stop flashing once a connection has been established
and the camera is exchanging data with the smart device.
D
Wi-Fi
Read the warnings on pages xvi to xviii before using the Wi-Fi function. To disable Wi-Fi in
settings in which its use is prohibited, select Wi-Fi > Network connection > Disable in the
camera setup menu. Note that Eye-Fi cards can not be used while Wi-Fi is enabled and that
the standby timer will not turn off while the Wireless Mobile Utility app on the smart device
is communicating with the camera. If no data are exchanged for about 5 minutes, the
standby timer will turn off. The camera Wi-Fi function is only available when a memory card
is inserted and can not be used when a USB or HDMI cable is connected. To prevent loss of
power while connected, charge the battery before enabling the network connection.
172 Wi-Fi
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart device. Movies can
not be selected for upload.
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload
1
Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar
playback.
2
Display playback options.
Press the P button
P button
3
Choose Select to send to smart device/
deselect.
Highlight Select to send to smart device/
deselect and press J. Pictures selected for
upload are indicated by a & icon; to
deselect, display or highlight the image and
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
A The & Icon
The & icon will no longer be displayed when upload is complete.
Wi-Fi 173
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload
To change the upload status of multiple pictures, use the Select to send to smart
device option in the playback menu.
1
Choose Select to send to smart device.
To display the menus, press the G button.
Highlight Select to send to smart device in
the playback menu and press 2.
G button
2
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to highlight pictures
and press W (Q) to select or deselect (to
view the highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button). Selected
pictures are marked by a & icon.
3
Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
174 Wi-Fi
W (Q) button
Camera Menus
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D (playback menu) tab.
G button
The playback menu contains the following options:
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Playback display options
Image review
Rotate tall
Slide show
Image type
Frame interval
DPOF print order
Rating
Select to send to smart device
Playback Folder
Default
—
Current
—
On
On
—
Still images and movies
2s
—
—
—
0
147
175
176
176
176
149
162
145
174
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose a folder for playback:
Option
Description
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage folder in the shooting
Current menu (0 178) are displayed during playback. This option is selected automatically
when a photo is taken; select All to view pictures in all folders.
All
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images 175
Playback Display Options
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose the information available in the playback photo
information display (0 136). Press 1 or 3 to highlight and
press 2 to select or deselect. Selected items are indicated by
check marks. To return to the playback menu, press J.
Image Review
G button ➜ D playback menu
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately
after shooting.
Rotate Tall
G button ➜ D playback menu
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be automatically rotated for
display in the monitor (pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation will
still be displayed in landscape orientation; 0 202). Note that because the camera
itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not
rotated automatically during image review.
176 D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C (shooting menu) tab.
G button
The shooting menu contains the following options:
Option
Reset shooting menu
Storage folder
Image quality
Image size
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance
Fluorescent
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Auto distortion control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
HDR (high dynamic range)
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
P, S, A, M
ISO sensitivity
Other modes
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Default
—
—
JPEG normal
Large
12-bit
Auto
Cool-white
fluorescent
Standard
—
Off
sRGB
Auto
Off
Off
Normal
100
Auto
Off
0
177
178
59
61
178
101
102
111
115
179
179
94
96
179
180
Option
Release mode
m, w
Other modes
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure mode
Number of shots
Auto gain
Interval timer shooting
Optical VR 1
Movie settings
Frame size/frame rate 2
Movie quality
Microphone
Wind noise reduction
Manual movie settings
Default
0
Continuous H
Single frame
45
Off
2
On
Off
68
On
181
—
Normal
Auto sensitivity
Off
Off
128
98
67
180
1 Available only with lenses that support this item.
2 Default varies with country of purchase.
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.
Reset Shooting Menu
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 177
Storage Folder
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which subsequent
photographs will be stored.
• Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored.
D5300 (default folder)
Current folder
Other folders (in alphabetical
order)
• New: Create a new folder and name it as described on page 116. Folder names can
be up to five characters long.
• Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described on page 116.
• Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.
D
Folder Names
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder number assigned
automatically by the camera (e.g., 100D5300). Each folder can contain up to 999
photographs. During shooting, pictures are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the
selected name. If a photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a
photograph numbered 9999, the camera will create a new folder by adding 1 to the current
folder number (e.g., 101D5300). The camera treats folders with the same name but different
folder numbers as the same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for Storage
folder, photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON, 101NIKON, 102NIKON, etc.) will
be visible when Current is selected for Playback folder (0 175). Renaming changes all
folders with the same name but leaves the folder numbers intact. Selecting Delete deletes
empty numbered folders but leaves other folders with the same name intact.
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Choose the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
( 12-bit
) 14-bit
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits, producing larger
files but increasing the amount of color data recorded.
178 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
Auto Distortion Control
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Select On to reduce barrel distortion in photos taken with wideangle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion in photos
taken with long lenses (note that the edges of the area visible in
the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph, and
that the time needed to process photographs before recording
begins may increase). This option does not apply to movies and is available only with
type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not
guaranteed with other lenses.
Color Space
G button ➜ C shooting menu
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for
color reproduction. sRGB is recommended for movies and for
general-purpose printing and display, Adobe RGB, with its
broader gamut of colors, for professional publication and
commercial printing.
A
Adobe RGB
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications, displays, and
printers that support color management.
A
Color Space
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically select the correct
color space when opening photographs created with this camera. Results can not be
guaranteed with third-party software.
Long Exposure NR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
If On is selected, photographs taken at shutter speeds slower
than 1 s will be processed to reduce noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The time required for
processing roughly doubles; during processing, “l m” will flash in the viewfinder
and pictures can not be taken (noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is
turned off before processing is complete).
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 179
High ISO NR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce “noise.”
Option
Description
High Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or fog), particularly in
Normal photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities. Choose the amount of noise reduction
performed from High, Normal, and Low.
Low
Noise reduction is only performed as required. The amount of noise reduction is
Off
less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR.
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Adjust ISO sensitivity (0 67).
❚❚ Auto ISO Sensitivity control
If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M modes, ISO sensitivity
will remain fixed at the value selected by the user (0 67). When On is chosen, ISO
sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at
the value selected by the user. The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity can be
selected using the Maximum sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control
menu (choose lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines, but note that if the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than that
chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the value selected by the user will be used instead;
the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100)). In modes
P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter
speed selected for Minimum shutter speed (1/2000–1 s, or Auto; in modes S and M,
sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the
user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the camera will choose the
minimum shutter speed based on the focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed
selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2). Slower shutter
speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO
sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity.
180 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
When On is selected, the viewfinder shows ISO-AUTO and the
information display ISO-A. These indicators flash when
sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user.
A
Maximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, the ISO sensitivity
and shutter speed graphics in the information display show the
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter speed.
Minimum shutter speed
Maximum sensitivity
A
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use
the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise (0 180). Note that ISO
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in
combination with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the optional
flash units listed on page 232), possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter
speeds. Auto ISO sensitivity control is available only in i-TTL flash control mode (0 192, 233);
in other modes, the value selected for ISO sensitivity will be used for pictures taken with the
built-in flash or optional flash units.
Optical VR
G button ➜ C shooting menu
This item is displayed only with lenses that support it. Selecting On enables
vibration reduction, which takes effect whenever the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway (0 268). Select Off to disable vibration reduction.
A
The Vibration Reduction Indicator
A vibration reduction indicator appears in the information display
when On is selected for Optical VR.
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 181
A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the A (Custom Settings
menu) tab.
G button
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings
to suit individual preferences.
Main menu
Reset custom
settings (0 183)
182 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Custom Setting groups
The following Custom Settings are available:
a
a1
a2
a3
a4
b
b1
c
c1
c2
c3
c4
d
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
e
e1
e2
f
f1
f2
Custom Setting
Reset custom settings
Autofocus
AF-C priority selection
Number of focus points
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
Rangefinder
Exposure
EV steps for exposure cntrl
Timers/AE lock
Shutter-release button AE-L
Auto off timers
Self-timer
Remote on duration (ML-L3)
Shooting/display
Beep
Viewfinder grid display
ISO display
File number sequence
Exposure delay mode
Print date
Bracketing/flash
Flash cntrl for built-in flash
Auto bracketing set
Controls
Assign Fn button
Assign AE-L/AF-L button
f3 Reverse dial rotation
Default
0
183
Focus
39 points
On
Off
184
184
185
185
1/3 step
186
Off
Normal
Self-timer delay: 10 s; number of shots: 1
1 min
186
186
187
187
Low
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
187
188
188
188
189
190
TTL
AE bracketing
192
192
ISO sensitivity
AE/AF lock
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
Release locked
193
194
f4 Slot empty release lock
f5 Reverse indicators
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.
Reset Custom Settings
194
194
194
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 183
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder photography (0 51), this option controls
whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed
(release priority) or only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Option
G Release
F Focus
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed.
Photos can only be taken once the camera has focused.
a2: Number of Focus Points
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-point selection.
Option
Description
Choose from the 39 focus points shown at right.
# 39 points
Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right. Use
for quick focus-point selection.
A 11 points
184 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
a3: Built-in AF-assist Illuminator
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist illuminator lights to assist
the focus operation when lighting is poor.
Option
On
Off
AF-assist illuminator
Description
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (for more information, see
page 252).
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation. The camera
may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a4: Rangefinder
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether the camera is
correctly focused in manual focus mode (0 57; note that this function is not available
in shooting mode M, when the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject
is correctly exposed).
Indicator
Description
Indicator
Subject in focus.
Focus point is slightly in
front of subject.
Focus point is well in
front of subject.
Description
Focus point is slightly
behind subject.
Focus point is well
behind subject.
Camera can not
determine correct
focus.
A
Using the Electronic Rangefinder
The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. The
desired results may not be achieved in situations in which the camera would be unable to
focus using autofocus (0 52). The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 185
b: Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select the increments used when making adjustments to
shutter speed, aperture, exposure and flash compensation, and
bracketing.
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
c2: Auto off Timers
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no operations are
performed during menu display and playback (Playback/menus), while
photographs are displayed in the monitor after shooting (Image review), and during
live view (Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and information
display remain on when no operations are performed (Standby timer). Choose
shorter auto-off delays to reduce the drain on the battery.
Option
Description (all times are approximate)
Auto off timers are set to the following values:
Playback/menus
Image review
Live view
C Short
Short
20 s
4s
5 min.
D Normal
Normal
1 min.
4s
10 min.
E Long
Long
5 min.
20 s
20 min.
F Custom
Standby timer
4s
8s
1 min.
Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image review, Live view, and
Standby timer. When settings are complete, press J.
A
Auto off Timers
The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the camera is connected to
a computer or printer via USB.
186 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c3: Self-Timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay and the number
of shots taken.
• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
• Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed (from 1
to 9; if a value other than 1 is selected, shots will be taken at
intervals of about 4 seconds).
c4: Remote on Duration (ML-L3)
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the camera will wait for a signal from the
optional ML-L3 remote control before cancelling remote release
mode. Choose shorter times for longer battery life. This setting
applies only during viewfinder photography.
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Beep
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses
and in self-timer and remote-control modes. Select Off to prevent the beep from
sounding.
The current setting is shown in the information display: 3 is
displayed when the beep is on, 2 when it is off.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 187
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in the viewfinder for reference when
composing photographs (0 4).
d3: ISO Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Select On to display ISO sensitivity in the viewfinder in place of the number of
exposures remaining.
d4: File Number Sequence
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding 1 to the last file
number used. This option controls whether file numbering continues from the last
number used when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or a new memory card
inserted in the camera, file numbering continues from the last number used. If a
On photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered
9999, a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again
from 0001.
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created, the memory card is
formatted, or a new memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder
Off
is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains
999 photographs.
Resets the file numbering for On to 0001 and creates a new folder with the next
Reset
photograph taken.
188 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
D
File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph
numbered 9999, the shutter-release button will be disabled and no further photographs can
be taken. Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 (File number sequence) and then either
format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
A
File Names
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where nnnn
is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by
the camera, and xxx is one of the following three-letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF (RAW)
images, “JPG” for JPEG images, or “MOV” for movies. The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a
setting of NEF (RAW)+JPEG have the same file names but different extensions. Copies
created with image overlay (0 211) and movie edit options (0 131) have file names
beginning with “DSC_” ; copies created with the other options in the retouch menu have file
names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001.JPG”). Images recorded with the Color space
option in the shooting menu set to Adobe RGB (0 179) have names that begin with an
underscore (e.g., “_DSC0001.JPG”).
d5: Exposure Delay Mode
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, select On to
delay shutter release until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed and
the mirror is raised.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 189
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d6: Print Date
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they are taken. Date
imprints can not be added to or removed from existing photos.
Option
Off
Description
The time and date do not appear on photographs.
The date or date and time are imprinted on
photographs taken while this option is in
b Date and time effect.
a Date
c Date counter
15 . 10 . 2013
15 . 10 . 2013 10 : 02
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp showing the number of
days between the date of shooting and a selected date (see below).
At settings other than Off, the selected option is indicated by a
d icon in the information display.
A
Print Date
The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date (0 201). The imprinted
data may be cropped out or rendered illegible in copies created when images are retouched
(0 205). The date does not appear on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images.
❚❚ Date Counter
Pictures taken while this option is in effect are imprinted with
the number of days remaining until a future date or the number
of days elapsed since a past date. Use it to track the growth of a
child or count down the days until a birthday or wedding.
02 / 20 . 10 . 2013
Future date (two days remaining)
02 / 24 . 10 . 2013
Past date (two days elapsed)
The camera offers three slots for storing dates.
1
Enter the first date.
The first time you select Date counter, you will be
prompted to enter a date for the first slot. Enter a date
using the multi selector and press J to exit to the date list.
190 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
2
Enter additional dates or edit existing dates.
To change a date or enter additional dates, highlight a slot,
press 2, and enter a date as described above.
3
Choose a date.
Highlight a slot in the date list and press J.
4
Choose a date counter format.
Highlight Display options and press 2, then highlight a
date format and press J.
5
Exit the date counter menu.
Press J to exit the date counter menu.
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 191
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M modes.
Option
1 TTL
Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
Choose a flash level. At full power, the built-in flash has
a Guide Number of 13/43 (m/ft., ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F).
2 Manual
A
Manual
A Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0 flashes in the
information display when Manual is selected and the flash is raised.
A
The SB-400 and SB-300
When an optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash unit is attached and turned on, Flash cntrl for
built-in flash changes to Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode for the optional
flash unit to be selected from TTL and Manual.
A
TTL Flash Control
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is used in combination
with the built-in flash (0 62) or optional flash units (0 232).
• i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 2016-pixel RGB sensor is used to
adjust flash output for a natural balance between the main subject and the background.
• Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the main subject; the
brightness of the background is not taken into account.
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when selected with the optional
flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used in all other cases.
e2: Auto Bracketing Set
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the setting (exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting) varied when
bracketing is in effect (0 108).
192 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
f: Controls
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f1: Assign Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button.
Fn button
Option
v
w
m
!
$
&
t
"
'
Description
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select
Image quality/size
image quality and size (0 59).
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select ISO
ISO sensitivity
sensitivity (0 67).
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select
White balance
white balance (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 101).
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to select
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 94).
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to adjust
HDR
HDR settings (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 96).
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or JPEG basic, an
NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the
+NEF (RAW)
Fn button is pressed. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW) copy,
press the Fn button again. This option has no effect in the following
special effects modes: %, g, ', (, 3, and ).
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose
Auto bracketing
the bracketing increment (exposure and white balance bracketing) or
to turn ADL bracketing on or off (P, S, A, and M modes only; 0 108).
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the command dial to choose an
AF-area mode
AF-area mode (0 53).
Press the Fn button to display or hide the
viewfinder framing grid.
Viewfinder grid
display
c Wi-Fi
Press the Fn button to display the Wi-Fi menu (0 169).
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings 193
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role played by the A (L) button.
Option
Description
Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button is
B AE/AF lock pressed.
C AE lock only Exposure locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the A (L) button is pressed,
E AE lock (Hold) and remains locked until the button is pressed a
second time or the standby timer expires.
F AF lock only Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.
The A (L) button initiates autofocus. The shutterA AF-ON
release button can not be used to focus.
f3: Reverse Dial Rotation
A (L) button
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dial when
they are used to make adjustments to exposure or flash
compensation (Exposure compensation) and/or shutter speed
and aperture (Shutter speed/aperture). Highlight options and
press 2 to select or deselect, then press J.
f4: Slot Empty Release Lock
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only enabled when a
memory card is inserted in the camera. Selecting Enable release allows the shutter
to be released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode).
f5: Reverse Indicators
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
If
(V) is selected, the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and
information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values
(W) to display negative values on the left and
on the right. Select
positive values on the right.
194 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup menu) tab.
G button
The setup menu contains the following options:
Option
Format memory card
Monitor brightness
Info display format
AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS
P/S/A/M
Auto info display
Clean image sensor
Clean at startup/shutdown
Lock mirror up for cleaning1
Image Dust Off ref photo
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date 2
Daylight saving time
Language 2
Auto image rotation
Image comment
Location data
Record location data
GPS options
Create log
Log list
Default
—
0
Graphic design
Graphic design
On
0
196
196
197
199
Option
Video mode 2
HDMI
Output resolution
Device control
Remote control
Remote shutter release
Assign Fn button
Clean at startup &
shutdown
—
—
Auto
243
199
200
Off
—
On
—
201
201
202
202
Off
—
—
—
74
241
Default
—
0
202
Auto
On
166
Take photos
Same as camera
4 button
203
Wi-Fi
Network connection
Network settings
Eye-Fi upload 3
Conformity marking
Firmware version
Disable
—
Enable
—
—
169
204
204
204
1 Not available when battery is low.
2 Default varies with country of purchase.
3 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted (0 204).
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed out and unavailable.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 195
Format Memory Card
G button ➜ B setup menu
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being formatted in other
devices. Format the card as described below.
D
Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain. Be sure to copy any
photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding (0 153).
1
Highlight Yes.
To exit without formatting the memory card,
highlight No and press J.
2
Press J.
A message will be displayed while the card is
formatted. Do not remove the memory card or
remove or disconnect the power source until
formatting is complete.
Monitor Brightness
G button ➜ B setup menu
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher
values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
196 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Info Display Format
G button ➜ B setup menu
Choose an information display format (0 6). Formats can be chosen separately for
auto, scene, and special effects modes and for P, S, A, and M modes.
Classic (0 198)
1
Graphic (0 6)
Select a shooting mode option.
Highlight AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS or P/S/A/M
and press 2.
2
Select a design.
Highlight a design and press J.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 197
The “Classic” display is shown below.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
13 14
15
16
17
18
23 22 21 20
19
12
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
37 36 35 34 33 32 31
1 Eye-Fi connection
indicator............................. 204
2 Wi-Fi connection
indicator............................. 172
3 Track log indicator ................ 77
4 Satellite signal indicator...... 75
5 Exposure delay mode ........ 189
6 Multiple exposure
indicator............................. 100
7 Print date indicator............. 190
8 Vibration reduction indicator
....................................... 18, 181
9 Flash control indicator ....... 192
Flash compensation indicator
for optional flash units ... 235
10 “Beep” indicator .................. 187
11 Battery indicator ................... 17
12 Help icon ...........................8, 256
13 Shooting mode
i auto/
j auto (flash off).............. 19
Scene modes...................... 30
Special effects mode........ 37
P, S, A, and M modes.......... 82
14 Autoexposure (AE) lock
indicator ...............................91
15 Shutter speed .........................83
16 Aperture (f-number).............83
17 Exposure indicator ................87
Exposure compensation
indicator ...............................92
Bracketing progress
indicator .............................110
18 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)............................15
19 Number of exposures
remaining.............................15
White balance recording
indicator ............................104
Capture mode indicator
20 ISO sensitivity ........................ 67
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator .............................180
21 Bracketing indicator ...........108
ADL bracketing amount ...110
22 Release mode .........................45
23 Auto-area AF indicator.........53
3D-tracking indicator ...........53
Focus point..............................55
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Image quality......................... 59
Image size ............................... 61
Bracketing increment ........ 109
HDR (High Dynamic
Range) .................................. 96
Active D-Lighting.................. 94
White balance ...................... 101
ISO sensitivity........................ 67
Exposure compensation...... 92
Flash compensation ............. 93
Flash mode ............................. 63
Metering.................................. 90
AF-area mode ............... 53, 120
Focus mode ................... 51, 119
Picture Control .................... 111
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
198 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
G button ➜ B setup menu
Auto Info Display
If On is selected, the information display will appear after the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway. If Off is selected, the information display can be viewed by
pressing the R button.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 (available
separately; for more information, see the Capture NX 2 manual).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the
camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended. When using a
zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1
Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following options and press
J. To exit without acquiring image dust off
data, press G.
• Start: The message shown at right will be
displayed and “rEF” will appear in the
viewfinder.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this option to
clean the image sensor before starting. The
message shown at right will be displayed and
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder when
cleaning is complete.
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed
can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed.
Select Clean sensor and then start only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not
be used with existing photographs.
2
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-lit, featureless
white object, frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the
shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity; in manual focus
mode, set focus to infinity manually.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 199
3
Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust
Off reference data.
If the reference object is too bright or too dark,
the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust
Off reference data and the message shown at
right will be displayed. Choose another reference
object and repeat the process from step 1.
D
Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with
different lenses or at different apertures. Reference images can not
be viewed using computer imaging software. A grid pattern is
displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera.
Flicker Reduction
G button ➜ B setup menu
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury-vapor
lighting during live view (0 118) or movie recording (0 126). Choose Auto to allow
the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match the
frequency to that of the local AC power supply.
A
Flicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local
power supply, test both options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker
reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you
should select mode A or M and choose a smaller aperture (higher f-number) before starting
live view. Note that flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie settings
> Manual movie settings (0 129) in mode M.
200 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
G button ➜ B setup menu
Time Zone and Date
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date
display order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is
automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
Time zone
Set the camera clock (0 15).
Date and time
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year
are displayed.
Date format
Daylight
saving time
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 201
G button ➜ B setup menu
Auto Image Rotation
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation,
allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback or when viewed in
ViewNX 2 or Capture NX 2 (available separately). The following orientations are
recorded:
Landscape (wide) orientation
Camera rotated 90° clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counterclockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose this option when
panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down.
A
Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for display during playback,
select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu (0 176).
Image Comment
G button ➜ B setup menu
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 236). The
comment is also visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display
(0 138). The following options are available:
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 116. Comments can be up to
36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to attach the comment to all
subsequent photographs. Attach comment can be turned
on and off by highlighting it and pressing 2. After choosing
the desired setting, press J to exit.
Video Mode
G button ➜ B setup menu
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR, be sure the camera video mode
matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).
202 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
G button ➜ B setup menu
Remote Control
Choose the functions performed using a remote cord or wireless remote controller.
❚❚ Remote Shutter Release
Choose whether the shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used for
photography or movie recording.
Option
y Take photos
z Record movies
Description
The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used to take
photographs.
The shutter-release button on the optional accessory is used for
movie recording. Press the button halfway to start live view or to
focus in AF-S and AF-F modes. Press the button all the way down to
start or end recording. Use the camera live view switch to end live
view.
❚❚ Assign Fn button
Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on wireless remote controllers.
Option
Description
Same as camera The Fn button on the wireless remote controller performs the
=4
4 button
function currently assigned to the camera A (L) button (0 194).
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller can be used to start
a
Live view
and end live view.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 203
Eye-Fi Upload
G button ➜ B setup menu
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card (available separately from
third-party suppliers) is inserted in the camera. Choose Enable to upload
photographs to a preselected destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if
signal strength is insufficient.
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where
wireless devices are prohibited.
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status is indicated by an icon
in the information display:
• d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.
• e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for
upload.
• f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled; waiting to begin upload.
• f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.
• g: Error.
D
Eye-Fi Cards
Whether due to errors or other causes, Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable
is selected. If a warning is displayed in the monitor (0 256), turn the camera off and remove
the card.
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not support other Eye-Fi
functions. Be sure to keep the card firmware updated. See the documentation provided with
the Eye-Fi card for more information; for information on the availability of Eye-Fi cards in
your country or region, contact the manufacturer.
A
Using Eye-Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode
Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye-Fi cards that support ad hoc
mode. Select longer values for Auto off timers > Standby timer in the setup menu (0 186).
Conformity Marking
G button ➜ B setup menu
View the standards with which the camera complies.
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
204 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
G button ➜ B setup menu
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch menu) tab.
G button
The retouch menu is used to create trimmed or retouched copies of the photographs
on the memory card, and is only available when a memory card containing
photographs is inserted in the camera.
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
Option
D-Lighting
Red-eye correction
Trim
Monochrome
Filter effects
Color balance
Image overlay
0
207
207
208
208
209
210
211
0
1
2
e
(
)
q
Option
NEF (RAW) processing
Resize
Quick retouch
Straighten
Distortion control
Fisheye
Color outline
0
213
214
215
215
215
216
216
Option
Color sketch
Perspective control
Miniature effect
Selective color
Edit movie
Side-by-side
p
comparison *
g
r
u
3
f
0
216
217
218
219
131
221
* Available only if retouch menu is displayed by pressing P and selecting Retouch in fullframe playback when a retouched image or original is displayed.
A
Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although with
the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie > Choose start/end point, each option
can be applied only once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.
A
Image Quality and Size
Except in the case of copies created with Trim and Resize, copies created from JPEG images
are the same size and quality as the original, while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are
saved as large fine-quality JPEG images.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 205
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1
Display retouch options.
Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu
and press 2.
2
Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the
X button).
A
Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or retouch
images created with other devices. If the image was
recorded at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) +
JPEG (0 59), retouch options apply only to the RAW
copy.
3
Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the
selected item. To exit without creating a
retouched copy, press G.
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy. Except in the
photo information “image only” page (0 136),
retouched copies are indicated by a N icon.
A
Creating Retouched Copies During Playback
To create a retouched copy of the picture currently displayed in full-frame playback (0 135),
press P, then highlight Retouch and press J and select a retouch option (Image overlay
excluded).
206 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
G button ➜ N retouch menu
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before
D-Lighting
D-Lighting
(portrait subject)
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed; the effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph.
❚❚ Portrait Subjects
Select Portrait subjects to restrict D-Lighting to portrait subjects.
A
Portrait Subjects
The camera automatically selects up to three subjects for portrait D-Lighting (note that
portrait D-Lighting can not be applied to photos taken with Off selected for Auto image
rotation in the setup menu; 0 202). Depending on composition and how the subjects are
posed, the desired results may not be achieved; if you are not satisfied, remove the check
from Portrait subjects.
Red-Eye Correction
G button ➜ N retouch menu
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and is available only with
photographs taken using the flash. The photograph selected for red-eye correction
can be previewed in the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
press J to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not always produce the
expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the
image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before
proceeding.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 207
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The
selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown
in yellow; create a cropped copy as described in the following
table.
To
Use
Description
Increase size of crop
X Press the X button to increase the size of the crop.
Reduce size of crop W (Q) Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of the crop.
Change crop aspect
ratio
Rotate the command dial to switch between aspect ratios of
3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.
Move crop
Use multi selector to position the crop.
Create copy
Save the current crop as a separate file.
A
Image Size
The size of the copy (which varies with crop size and aspect ratio) appears at upper left in the
crop display.
A
Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.
Monochrome
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Copy photographs in Black-and-white, Sepia, or
Cyanotype (blue and white monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview
of the selected image; press 1 to increase color
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J to create a
monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
208 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Filter Effects
G button ➜ N retouch menu
After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Skylight
Warm filter
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the
picture less blue.
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving
the copy a “warm” red cast.
Red intensifier
Intensify reds (Red intensifier), greens (Green
Green intensifier intensifier), or blues (Blue intensifier). Press 1 to
increase the effect, 3 to decrease.
Blue intensifier
Add starburst effects to light sources.
• Number of points: Choose from four, six, or eight.
• Filter amount: Choose the brightness of the light
sources affected.
Cross screen
• Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.
• Length of points: Choose the length of points.
• Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter. Press X
to preview the copy full frame.
• Save: Create a retouched copy.
Soft
Add a soft filter effect. Press 4 or 2 to choose the
filter strength.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 209
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Balance
Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color
balance as shown below. Red, green, and blue histograms
(0 137) show the distribution of tones in the copy.
Increase amount of green
Increase amount of
blue
Create retouched copy
Increase amount of amber
Increase amount of magenta
A
Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor, press the X
button. The histogram will be updated to show data only for the
portion of the image displayed in the monitor. While the image is
zoomed in, press the A (L) button to toggle back and forth
between color balance and zoom. When zoom is selected, you can
zoom in and out with the X and W (Q) buttons and scroll the image
with the multi selector.
210 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to create a single
picture that is saved separately from the originals; the results, which make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image quality and size
settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and size (0 59, 61; all options
are available). To create an NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
+
1
Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu
and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will be displayed, with
Image 1 highlighted; press J to display a list of
the NEF (RAW) pictures created with this camera.
2
Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to highlight the first
photograph in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full frame, press and
hold the X button. Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and return to the
preview display.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 211
3
Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2 and press J,
then select the second photo as described in Step 2.
4
Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize
exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to
select gain from values between 0.1 and 2.0.
Repeat for the second image. The default value is
1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The
effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
5
Preview the overlay.
Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the Preview
column and press 1 or 3 to highlight Overlay.
Press J to preview the overlay as shown at right
(to save the overlay without displaying a preview,
select Save). To return to Step 4 and select new
photos or adjust gain, press W (Q).
6
Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the
overlay. After an overlay is created, the resulting
image will be displayed full-frame in the monitor.
D
Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit depth can be combined (0 178). The
overlay has the same photo info as the photograph selected for Image 1.
212 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
G button ➜ N retouch menu
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1
Select NEF (RAW) processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW) processing in the retouch
menu and press 2 to display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with
this camera.
2
Select a photograph.
Use the multi selector to highlight a photograph
(to view the highlighted photograph full frame,
press and hold the X button). Press J to select
the highlighted photograph and proceed to the
next step.
3
Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance is not available with
pictures created with multiple exposure or image overlay, and that the effects
of exposure compensation may differ from those that might have been
expected when the photograph was taken.
Image quality (0 59)
Image size (0 61)
White balance (0 101)
Exposure compensation (0 92)
Picture Control (0 111)
High ISO NR (0 180)
Color space (0 179)
D-Lighting (0 207)
4
Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J to create a JPEG copy
of the selected photograph. To exit without
copying the photograph, press the G button.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 213
Resize
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create small copies of one or more selected photographs.
1
Select Resize.
Highlight Resize in the retouch menu and press
2.
2
Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
3
Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
Highlight pictures using the multi selector
and press the W (Q) button to select or
deselect (to view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button).
Selected pictures are marked by a 1 icon.
W (Q) button
Press J when the selection is complete.
4
Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Highlight Yes and press J to save the resized
copies.
A
Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
214 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Quick Retouch
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast.
D-Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit
subjects.
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of enhancement. Press J to
copy the photograph.
Straighten
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a straightened copy of the selected image. Press 2 to
rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments
of approximately 0.25 degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise
(note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a
rectangular copy). Press J to save the retouched copy.
Distortion Control
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion. Select Auto
to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi selector, or select
Manual to reduce distortion manually (note that Auto is not
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see
page 179).
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion distortion (note that
greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out).
Press J to save the retouched copy.
D
Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain
other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other lenses.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 215
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Fisheye
Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye
lens. Press 2 to increase the effect (this also increases the
amount that will be cropped out at the edges of the image), 4
to reduce it. Press J to save the retouched copy.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Outline
Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for
painting. Press J to save the retouched copy.
Before
After
Color Sketch
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made
with colored pencils. Press 1 or 3 to highlight Vividness or
Outlines and press 4 or 2 to change. Vividness can be
increased to make colors more saturated, or decreased for a
washed-out, monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made
thicker or thinner. Thicker outlines make colors more saturated.
Press J to save the retouched copy.
216 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from
the base of a tall object. Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts of perspective control
result in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save
the retouched copy.
Before
After
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 217
Miniature Effect
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works best with photos taken
from a high vantage point. The area that will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a
yellow frame.
To
Choose
orientation
Press
Description
W (Q) Press W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is in focus.
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 1 or
3 to position frame showing area of copy that
will be in focus.
Choose area
in focus
Area in focus
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 4 or 2
to position frame showing area of copy that will
be in focus.
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4 or 2 to choose height.
Choose size
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1 or 3 to choose width.
Create copy
Create copy.
218 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Selective Color
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.
1
Select Selective color.
Highlight Selective color in the retouch menu
and press 2.
2
Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph and press J (to view the
highlighted photograph full frame, press and
hold the X button).
3
Select a color.
Selected color
Use the multi selector to position the cursor
over an object and press A (L) to select
the color of the object as one that will
remain in the final copy (the camera may
have difficulty detecting unsaturated colors;
choose a saturated color). To zoom in on the A (L) button
picture for precise color selection, press X.
Press W (Q) to zoom out.
4
Highlight the color range.
Color range
Rotate the command dial to highlight the color
range for the selected color.
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 219
5
Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of
similar hues that will be included in the final
photograph. Choose from values between 1 and
7; note that higher values may include hues from
other colors.
6
Select additional colors.
To select additional colors, rotate the command
dial to highlight another of the three color boxes
at the top of the display and repeat Steps 3–5 to
select another color. Repeat for a third color if
desired. To deselect the highlighted color, press
O (To remove all colors, press and hold O. A
confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).
7
Save the edited copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
220 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
Side-by-side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This option is only available
if the retouch menu is displayed by pressing the P button and selecting Retouch
when a copy or original is played back full frame.
1
Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy (shown by a N icon)
or a photograph that has been retouched in
full-frame playback. Press P, then highlight
Retouch and press J.
2
P button
Select Side-by-side comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side comparison in the
retouch menu and press J.
3
Compare the copy with the original.
Options used to create
copy
The source image is displayed on the left, the
retouched copy on the right, with the
options used to create the copy listed at the
top of the display. Press 4 or 2 to switch
between the source image and the
retouched copy. To view the highlighted
Source Retouched
picture full frame, press and hold the X
image
copy
button. If the copy was created from two
images using Image overlay, press 1 or 3
to view the other source image. If multiple copies exist for the current source
image, press 1 or 3 to view the other copies. Press J to return to playback
with the highlighted image displayed.
D
Side-by-side comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that has
since been deleted or that was protected when the copy was made (0 143).
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 221
m Recent Settings/O My Menu
Both recent settings, a menu listing the 20 most recently used settings, and My Menu,
a custom menu listing up to 20 user-selected options, can be accessed by pressing
the G button highlighting the last tab in the menu list (either m or O).
G button
Choosing a Menu
Use the Choose tab option to choose the menu displayed.
1
Select Choose tab.
Highlight Choose tab and press 2.
2
Select a menu.
Highlight O MY MENU or m RECENT
SETTINGS and press J to display the
selected menu.
m Recent Settings
When m RECENT SETTINGS is selected for Choose tab, the
menu lists the 20 most recently used settings, with the most
recently-used items first. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option
and press 2 to select.
A
Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and
press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O
again to delete the selected item.
222 m Recent Settings/O My Menu
O My Menu
Selecting O MY MENU for Choose tab lets you access a customized menu of up to
20 options selected from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and
retouch menus. Follow the steps below to add items to, delete items from, and
reorder items in My Menu.
❚❚ Adding Options to My Menu
1
Select Add items.
Highlight Add items and press 2.
2
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing
the option you wish to add and press 2.
3
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press
J.
4
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new item up or
down in My Menu. Press J to add the new
item. Repeat steps 1–4 to select additional
items.
A
Adding Options to My Menu
The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check
mark. Items indicated by a V icon can not be selected.
m Recent Settings/O My Menu 223
❚❚ Deleting Options from My Menu
1
Select Remove items.
Highlight Remove items and press 2.
2
Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to select or
deselect. Selected items are indicated by a
check mark.
3
Delete the selected items.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; press J again to delete the
selected items.
224 m Recent Settings/O My Menu
❚❚ Reordering Options in My Menu
1
Select Rank items.
Highlight Rank items and press 2.
2
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and
press J.
3
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in
My Menu and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.
4
Exit to My Menu.
Press the G button to return to My Menu.
G button
m Recent Settings/O My Menu 225
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories, cleaning and storing
the camera, and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter
problems using the camera.
Compatible Lenses
Compatible CPU Lenses
This camera supports autofocus with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I CPU lenses only. AF-S lenses
have names beginning with AF-S, AF-P lenses with AF-P, and AF-I lenses with AF-I.
Autofocus is not supported with other autofocus (AF) lenses. The following table lists
the features available with compatible lenses in viewfinder photography:
Camera setting
Focus
Mode
Metering
L
MF (with electronic
M
rangefinder)
Lens/accessory
AF
MF M Other modes 3D Color N
AF-S, AF-P, AF-I NIKKOR
z
z
z z
z
z — z1
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR
—
z
z z
z
z — z1
PC-E NIKKOR series 2, 3
—
z4
z z
z
z — z1
5
4
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D
—
z
z z
—
z — z1
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter
z6
z6
z z
z
z — z1
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF)
—
z7
z z
z
— ✔ z1
AI-P NIKKOR
—
z8
z z
z
— ✔ z1
1 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 90).
2 Observe due caution when tilting or shifting PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED lenses, as they may contact
the camera body and cause damage or injury.
3 Shifting and/or tilting the lens interferes with exposure.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 Optimal exposure will only be achieved if the lens is at maximum aperture and the lens is not shifted
or tilted.
6 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
7 When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5
lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the in-focus indicator (I) may be
displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Before shooting,
confirm that the image in the viewfinder screen is in focus.
8 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
• Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus when movies are recorded at high ISO
sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.
D
IX NIKKOR Lenses
IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
226 Technical Notes
A
Identifying CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a
letter on the lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
CPU lens
Aperture ring
Type G or E lens
Type D lens
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the
minimum aperture (highest f-number).
A
Matrix Metering
For matrix metering, the camera uses a 2016-pixel RGB sensor to set exposure according to
tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D lenses, distance information
(3D color matrix metering II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses color matrix metering
II; which does not include 3D distance information).
Technical Notes 227
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode M. Selecting another
mode disables the shutter release. Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens
aperture ring and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other features
requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU lenses can not be used; see
“Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses,” below.
Camera setting
Focus
MF (with electronic
rangefinder)
z1
z
—
z4
z5
z1
z1
Mode
Lens/accessory
AF
MF
M Other modes
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses
—
z
z2
—
—
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4
—
z z 2, 3
—
Reflex NIKKOR
—
z
z2
PC NIKKOR
—
z
z2
—
z
z2
—
AI-type Teleconverter
—
—
z
z2
—
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 6
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)
—
z
z2
—
1 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
2 Exposure indicator can not be used.
3 Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.
4 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
5 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
6 Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).
D
Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D5300:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,
1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)
228 Technical Notes
D
AF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.); when using the
illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 18–200 mm and remove the lens hood. AF-assist
illumination is not available with the following lenses:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED
•
•
•
•
•
AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-assist illuminator and
interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G
IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.8G
• AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G
• AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED
Technical Notes 229
D
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 18–300 mm, although in
some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal
lengths due to shadows cast by the lens (see the illustration below), while lenses that block
the subject’s view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye reduction.
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
Shadow
Vignetting
The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m and can not be used in the macro range of macro
zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at
ranges less than those given below:
Lens
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm f/4G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting
24 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
35 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
24–85 mm
No vignetting
28 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED
35 mm
No vignetting
28 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED
35 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
45–55 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED
28 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
35 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED
28–35 mm
No vignetting
18 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 4 in.
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR,
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G
24–55 mm
No vignetting
18 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED
24–70 mm
No vignetting
18 mm
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
18 mm
2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
24–135 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
35–140 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
35–200 mm
No vignetting
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
35–300 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
230 Technical Notes
Lens
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm f/2.8D IF
AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED *
* When not shifted or tilted.
Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting
24 mm
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.
28 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
35 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
35 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.
50–70 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
28–120 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.
35 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.
50–70 mm
No vignetting
28 mm
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.
35 mm
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.
250 mm
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.
350 mm
2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.
200 mm
5.0 m/16 ft 5 in.
250 mm
3.0 m/ 9 ft 10 in.
300–400 mm
No vignetting
24 mm
3.0 m/ 9 ft 10 in.
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be unable to light the
entire subject at all ranges.
A
Calculating Angle of View
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The size of the area exposed
by the D5300, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm, meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm
camera is approximately 1.5 times that of the D5300. The approximate focal length of lenses
for the D5300 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens
by about 1.5.
Picture size (35mm format)
(36 × 24 mm)
Lens
Picture diagonal
Picture size (D5300)
(23.5 × 15.6 mm)
Angle of view (35mm format)
Angle of view (D5300)
Technical Notes 231
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and can be used with
CLS-compatible flash units. The built-in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit
is attached.
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash units:
Flash unit
SB-910 1 SB-900 1
SB-800
SB-700 1
SB-600
SB-400 2 SB-300 2 SB-R200 3
ISO
100
34/111
34/111
38/125
28/92
30/98
21/69
18/59
10/33
Guide No. 4
ISO 200
48/157 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138
30/98
25/82
14/46
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when AUTO or N (flash) is selected for white
balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
2 Wireless flash control is not available.
3 Controlled remotely using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit or SU-800 wireless
Speedlight commander.
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position; SB-910,
SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.
Feature
• The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a CLS-compatible
camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for remote SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800
itself is not equipped with a flash.
A
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved communication between
the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography. Refer to the
documentation provided with the flash unit for details.
A
Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number by the aperture.
For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft (35 mm zoom head
position); its range at an aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the
Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).
232 Technical Notes
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash units:
CLS-compatible flash units
SU-800
SB-910
Close-up
SB-900 SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 Commander photography SB-R200 SB-400 SB-300
Single flash
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
for digital SLR 1
i-TTL
Standard i-TTL flash for
digital SLR
AA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
Distance-priority
GN
manual
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Remote flash control
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
AA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless flash
[A:B]
control
AA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Flash Color Information
Communication
AF-assist for multi-area AF
Red-eye reduction
Camera flash mode selection
Camera flash unit firmware
update
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
z
z
z2
z2
z
z2
—
—
—
z
z
z3
z3
z3
z3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z4
z4
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
Remote
Master
Advanced Wireless Lighting
—
—
z
—
—
z
—
—
—
z5
z
z
z
z
z5
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
z
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
—
—
z
—
—
z5
z
z
z
z5
z
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
z
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
z
—
—
—
—
—
z
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. A is selected when a non-CPU lens
is used.
4 Can only be selected with camera (0 192).
5 When a non-CPU lens is used, non-TTL auto (A) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
Technical Notes 233
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes. Use with
the camera in exposure mode S or M and a shutter speed of 1/200 s or slower selected.
Flash unit SB-80DX, SB-28DX, SB-28,
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-22S,
SB-23, SB-29 3,
SB-26, SB-25, SB-24
SB-22, SB-20, SB-16B, SB-15 SB-21B 3, SB-29S 3
Flash mode
SB-50DX 1
A Non-TTL auto
z
—
z
—
M Manual
z
z
z
z
G Repeating flash
z
—
—
—
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4
z
z
z
z
1 Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.
2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-TTL auto
flash).
3 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm
f/2.8G ED lenses only.
4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
A
The AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is mounted on the camera
accessory shoe, flash accessories can be connected via a sync cable.
D
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory
shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera
or flash. Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
234 Technical Notes
D
Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash unit supports CLS, refer
to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR cameras. The D5300 is not included in the
“digital SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %, 3, and ) the flash
will fire with every shot, even in modes in which the built-in flash can not be used.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 12800. At values over
12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings. If the
flash-ready indicator flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash
has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash
units only; for information on the exposure and flash charge indicators on other units, see
the manual provided with the flash).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct
exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you choose spot
metering to select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the
monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit. Do not use other
panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.
If the controls on the optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or SB-600 flash unit or SU-800
wireless Speedlight commander are used to set flash compensation, Y will appear in the
information display.
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the
following restrictions:
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available with 17–
135 mm AF lenses, however,
17–19 mm
20–105 mm
106–135 mm
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist
illumination is available with 24–
105 mm AF lenses, however,
24–34 mm
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
autofocus is available only with the
focus points shown at right.
• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
lenses, however, autofocus is
24–135 mm
available only with the focus points
shown at right.
Technical Notes 235
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D5300.
Power
sources
Filters
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
Software
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a (0 11): Additional EN-EL14a batteries are
available from local retailers and Nikon-authorized service representatives.
EN-EL14 batteries can also be used.
• Battery Charger MH-24 (0 11): Recharge EN-EL14a and EN-EL14 batteries.
• Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can be used to power
the camera for extended periods (EH-5a and EH-5 AC adapters can also be
used). A power connector EP-5A is required to connect the camera to the
EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5; see page 239 for details.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus
or the electronic rangefinder.
• The D5300 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use C-PL or C-PL II
circular polarizing filters instead.
• NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is
framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors
(filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S,
ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for details.
• DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with diopters of –5, –4, –3,
–2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is
in the neutral position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the
desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control
(–1.7 to +1.0 m–1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure
that the desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup can not be used
with eyepiece correction lenses.
• Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the
viewfinder for greater precision during focusing. Eyepiece adapter required
(available separately).
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier.
The monitor can not be rotated with the adapter in place.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the
viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at
right angles to the lens (for example, from directly above when the camera is
horizontal). The monitor can not be rotated with the attachment in place.
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package offering such features as white
balance adjustment and color control points.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a computer to record
movies and photographs and save photographs directly to the computer hard
disk.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon software offers an
auto update feature (Nikon Message Center 2) when the computer is connected
to the Internet. See the websites listed on page xiv for the latest information on
supported operating systems.
236 Technical Notes
Body cap
Remote
controls/
wireless
remote
controller
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder screen,
and image sensor free of dust when a lens is not in place.
• Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (0 70): The ML-L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery.
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q), insert a fingernail into the
gap and open the battery chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in
the correct orientation (r).
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10 */WR-T10: When a WR-R10 wireless remote
controller is attached, the camera can be controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10
wireless remote controller (0 71, 203). The WR-T10 uses a 3 V CR2032 battery.
Insert a fingernail into the gap behind the battery-chamber latch and open the
battery chamber (q). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct
orientation (e).
• Wireless Remote Controller WR-1 (0 71, 203): WR-1 units are used in groups of two
or more, with one functioning as a transmitter and the remaining units acting
as receivers. The receivers are attached to the accessory terminals of one or
more cameras, allowing the transmitter to be used to release the camera
shutters.
Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0 129) *
The D5300 is equipped with an accessory terminal for
WR-1 and WR-R10 wireless remote controllers (0 71), MC-DC2
remote cords (0 88), and GP-1/GP-1A GPS units (0 81),
Accessory
which connect with the 4 mark on the connector
terminal
accessories aligned with the 2 next to the accessory terminal
(close the connector cover when the terminal is not in
use).
USB and A/V • UC-E17 and UC-E6 USB cables (0 153, 156): The supplied UC-E17 cable is not
connector
available for separate purchase; purchase UC-E6 cables instead.
accessories • EG-CP16 audio/video cables
* A wireless remote controller can not be attached at the same time as an ME-1 stereo
microphone. Attempting to forcibly attach accessories can damage the camera or
accessory.
A
Optional Accessories
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest
information.
Technical Notes 237
Approved Memory Cards
The camera supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, including SDHC
and SDXC cards compliant with UHS-I. Cards rated SD Speed Class 6 or
better are recommended for movie recording; using slower cards may result in
recording being interrupted. When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure
they are compatible with the device. Contact the manufacturer for information on
features, operation, and limitations on use.
238 Technical Notes
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.
1
Ready the camera.
Open the battery-chamber (q) and power connector (w)
covers.
2
Insert the EP-5A power connector.
Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation shown,
using the connector to keep the orange battery latch
pressed to one side. Be sure the connector is fully inserted.
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.
Position the power connector cable so that it passes
through the power connector slot and close the batterychamber cover.
4
Connect the AC adapter.
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter (e) and
the EP-5A power cable to the DC socket (r). A P icon is displayed in the
monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector.
Technical Notes 239
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and
store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or
mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as
televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below –10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After
using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and lint with a blower. If
Lens,
using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To
mirror, and
remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft
viewfinder
cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains,
Monitor
wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure,
as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Camera
body
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that the
camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative once
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if
the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as
lenses or optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
240 Technical Notes
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing in photographs, you
can clean the sensor using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The
sensor can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
1
Place the camera base down.
Image sensor cleaning is most effective when
the camera is placed base down as shown at
right.
2
Select Clean image sensor in the setup
menu.
Press the G button to display the menus.
Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup
menu (0 195) and press 2.
3
G button
Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and press J.
The camera will check the image sensor and then
begin cleaning. 1 flashes in the viewfinder
and other operations can not be performed. Do
not remove or disconnect the power source until
cleaning is complete and the message shown at
right is no longer displayed.
Technical Notes 241
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1
Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Select Clean image sensor, then highlight Clean
at startup/shutdown and press 2.
2
Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J. Choose from
Clean at startup, Clean at shutdown, Clean at
startup & shutdown, and Cleaning off.
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not be fully removed using
the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0 243) or
consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning
may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be
performed again after a short wait.
242 Technical Notes
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu (0 241), the sensor can be cleaned manually as
described below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily
damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1
Charge the battery.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the image
sensor. Be sure the battery is fully charged before proceeding.
2
Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3
Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and press the G
button to display the menus. Highlight Lock
mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu
and press 2 (note that this option is not
available at battery levels of H or below). G button
4
Press J.
The message shown at right will be displayed in the
monitor.
5
Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release button all the way down. The
mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open,
revealing the image sensor.
6
Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls on the image sensor,
examine the interior of the camera for dust or lint. If no
foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 8.
Technical Notes 243
7
Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the sensor with a blower.
Do not use a blower-brush, as the bristles could damage
the sensor. Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can
only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel.
Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the
sensor.
8
Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.
Replace the lens or body cap.
A
Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror
is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is
raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and the self-timer lamp
will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after
about two minutes. End cleaning or inspection immediately.
D
Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed or exchanged (or
in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the camera itself ) may adhere to the
image sensor, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To
protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be
adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the image sensor cleaning
option as described on page 241. If the problem persists, clean the sensor manually (0 243)
or have the sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by
the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image
options available in some imaging applications.
244 Technical Notes
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Caring for the Camera
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur
when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the
device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment
that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or
the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the
monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light
source for an extended period. Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or
produce a white blur effect in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not unplug the product or
remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted.
Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to
product memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then
wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any
sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 241, 243) for information on cleaning the image sensor.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged. Under
no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or
subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear
the curtain.
Technical Notes 245
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you are
using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an
extended period, remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag
containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may
cause the material to deteriorate. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb
moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month. Turn the
camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery
away.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least 99.99% of
pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these
displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or malfunction. Dust or lint
on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering
the eyes and mouth.
Moiré: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an image containing a
regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave in cloth or windows in a building, with the
camera image sensor grid. If you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance
to the subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject and the
camera.
Caring for the Battery
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the following precautions when
handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal
cover. These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the
battery down to the point that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for
some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a location
with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold
locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.
• Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully discharged will shorten
battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use.
246 Technical Notes
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use. Attempting to
charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery
performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery
to cool before charging.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room
temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new EN-EL14a battery.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important occasions, ready a
spare EN-EL14a battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be
difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange
the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local regulations.
Technical Notes 247
Available Settings
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode.
i, j
z
z
—
—
z
z
—
—
P, S, A, M
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Long exposure NR
z
z
High ISO NR
z
z
ISO sensitivity settings 3
—
z
Release mode 2
Multiple exposure 2
z4
—
z
z
Interval timer shooting
z
z
Movie settings
z
z
Image quality 2
Image size 2
White balance 2
Set Picture Control 2
Auto distortion control
Color space
Active D-Lighting 2
HDR (high dynamic range) 2
Shooting menu 1
248 Technical Notes
k, l, p, m, n,
o, r, s, t, u, %, g, ', (, 3,
v, w, x, y, z, 0 1, 2, 3, )
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
(not available
in % mode)
z
z
(not available
in % mode)
z
z
(not available
in % mode)
z4
z4
—
—
z
z
(not available
in ) mode)
z
z
Other settings 2
i, j
P, S, A, M
Focus mode (viewfinder)
z
z
AF-area mode (viewfinder)
z4
z
Focus mode (live view/movie)
z
z
AF-area mode (live view/movie)
—
z
AE-L/AF-L button hold
—
Flexible program
—
Metering
—
z
z
(available
only in P
mode)
z
Exposure compensation
—
z
3
4
—
—
—
—
z4
(available only
in % mode)
—
—
—
z
—
z4
z4
z4
(not
(not available
(available only
Flash mode
available
z
in l, m, r, t,
in g and '
in j
u, v, x, y, z,
modes)
mode)
and 0 modes)
Flash compensation
—
z
—
—
Reset with Reset shooting menu (0 177).
Reset with two-button reset (0 72). Individual settings for multiple exposure are
unaffected.
Selecting P, S, A, or M mode after selecting Auto for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO
sensitivity resets ISO sensitivity to the value last selected in P, S, A, and M modes.
Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting.
Bracketing
1
2
k, l, p, m, n,
o, r, s, t, u, %, g, ', (, 3,
v, w, x, y, z, 0 1, 2, 3, )
z
z
(not available
in % mode)
z4
(not
available
z4
in % and (
modes)
z
z
z4
z4
(not available
in ( mode)
z4
z4
Technical Notes 249
i, j
z
z
P, S, A, M
z
z
z
z
a4: Rangefinder
z
b1: EV steps for exposure cntrl
z
c1: Shutter-release button AE-L
z
c2: Auto off timers
z
c3: Self-timer
z
c4: Remote on duration (ML-L3)
z
d1: Beep
z
d2: Viewfinder grid display
z
d3: ISO display
z
d4: File number sequence
z
d5: Exposure delay mode
z
d6: Print date
z
e1: Flash cntrl for built-in flash
—
e2: Auto bracketing set
—
f1: Assign Fn button
z
f2: Assign AE-L/AF-L button
z
f3: Reverse dial rotation
z
f4: Slot empty release lock
z
f5: Reverse indicators
z
* Reset with Reset custom settings (0 183).
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
a1: AF-C priority selection
a2: Number of focus points
a3: Built-in AF-assist illuminator
Custom Settings *
250 Technical Notes
k, l, p, m, n,
o, r, s, t, u, %, g, ', (, 3,
v, w, x, y, z, 0 1, 2, 3, )
z
z
z
z
z
z
(not available
(not available
in l, m, r, t,
in % and (
u, v, and w
modes)
modes)
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
—
—
—
—
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of common problems below
before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the problem persists, turn the
camera off. If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using
an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been recorded will not be affected
by removing or disconnecting the power source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (0 16). If this does not correct the problem,
select single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 0 51), single-point AF (c; 0 53), and the center focus
point, and then frame a high-contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter
adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If necessary,
viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses (0 236).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 (Auto off timers;
0 186).
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If
information display does not appear when you remove your finger from shutter-release
button, confirm that On is selected for Auto info display (0 199) and that battery is charged.
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness of this display vary
with temperature.
Shooting (All Modes)
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (0 12, 15).
• Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f4 (Slot empty release lock; 0 194) and no
memory card is inserted (0 12).
• Built-in flash is charging (0 23).
• Camera is not in focus (0 21).
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f-number (0 227).
• Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0 228).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting mode: Continuous
shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (0 47, 62).
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and vertical frame coverage
is approximately 95%.
Technical Notes 251
Photos are out of focus:
• AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S, AF-P, or AF-I lens or focus manually.
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock (0 52, 55, 57).
• Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (0 57).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A (L) button to lock focus
when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving
subjects in AF-A mode (0 55).
Can not select focus point:
• e (Auto-area AF; 0 53) is selected: choose another AF-area mode.
• Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 23).
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (0 51, 57).
AF-assist illuminator does not light:
• AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus mode (0 51) or if
continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. AFassist is also not available when 3D-tracking is selected for AF-area mode; if single-point or
dynamic-area AF is selected, select center focus point (0 53, 55).
• The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.
• Off is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Built-in AF-assist illuminator, 0 185).
• The AF-assist illuminator can not be used in some shooting modes (0 248).
• Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot with continued use;
wait for it to cool down.
Image size can not be changed: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image quality (0 60).
Camera is slow to record photos:
• Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, access lamp may light
for up to about a minute after shooting ends in continuous release modes.
• Turn long exposure noise reduction off (0 179).
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn high ISO noise reduction on (0 180).
• Shutter speed is slower than 1 s: use long exposure noise reduction (0 179).
• Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise (0 95).
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:
• Replace battery in remote control (0 237).
• Choose remote control release mode (0 70).
• Flash is charging (0 23).
• Time selected for Custom Setting c4 (Remote on duration (ML-L3), 0 187) has elapsed.
• Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote control.
Beep does not sound:
• Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 (Beep; 0 187).
• Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (0 48), or movie is being recorded (0 126).
• MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is selected (0 51).
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If problem persists, perform
image sensor cleaning (0 241).
Date is not imprinted on photos: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image quality (0 60, 190).
252 Technical Notes
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone
(0 128).
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for Flicker reduction
that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply (0 200).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.
Shooting (P, S, A, M)
Shutter-release disabled:
• Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0 228).
• Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected in mode M: choose
new shutter speed (0 85).
• If white-balance bracketing is active, shutter release will be disabled and viewfinder
exposure-count display will flash if there is insufficient space on memory card to record all
images in bracketing sequence. Insert new memory card.
Full range of shutter speeds not available:
• Flash in use (0 66).
• When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in the shooting menu,
the range of available shutter speed varies with the frame rate (0 129).
Can not select desired aperture: Range of available apertures varies with lens used.
Colors are unnatural:
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0 101).
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0 111).
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 106).
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created with D5300 (0 107).
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for sharpening, contrast, or
saturation. For consistent results over a series of photos, choose another setting (0 113).
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 91).
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose mode P, S, or A (0 82, 92).
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Turn long-exposure noise
reduction on (0 179).
Playback
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF (RAW)+JPEG (0 60).
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder. Note that Current is
automatically selected after photograph is taken (0 175).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 176).
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 202).
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 176).
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0 202).
Technical Notes 253
Can not delete picture:
• Picture is protected: remove protection (0 143).
• Memory card is locked (0 12).
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera (0 205).
Can not change print order:
• Memory card is full: delete pictures (0 15, 146).
• Memory card is locked (0 12).
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG copy using NEF (RAW)
processing or transfer to computer and print using supplied software or Capture NX 2 (0 153,
213, 236).
Picture is not displayed on TV:
• Choose correct video mode (0 202) or output resolution (0 166).
• A/V (0 164) or HDMI (0 165) cable is not correctly connected.
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:
• Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0 166).
• Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with
the device.
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer software. Use card
reader to copy photos to computer (0 152).
Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0 236).
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the
position of dust on the image sensor. Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image
sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed. Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is
performed (0 199).
254 Technical Notes
Location Data
The camera is unable or slow to acquire a satellite signal: Local geographic and atmospheric conditions
may prevent or delay the acquisition of location data. For best results, choose a location with
an unobstructed view of the sky. The built-in location data unit may take some time to acquire
a signal immediately after the battery is inserted or when the record location data function is
enabled for the first time, or after an extended period of disuse. Update the assisted GPS file
(0 80).
Location data are not recorded with photographs: Check signal strength (0 75). The camera will only
record location data if a # or $ indicator appears in the information display; data will not be
recorded if the indicator is flashing.
Location data are incorrect: The accuracy of location data may vary by up to several hundred
meters depending signal quality and local topographic conditions.
Can not update the assisted GPS file:
• Confirm that the camera clock is set (0 201).
• Confirm that the memory card inserted in the camera contains an assisted GPS file and that
the file is in the correct folder (0 80).
• The file may be corrupt. Download the file again.
Can not start a new track log:
• Confirm that the camera clock is set (0 201).
• If the camera is already recording a track log, select Location data > Create log > End to
end the current log before starting a new log.
• The memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (0 12, 15), or the maximum number of log
files (36 files per day, with a maximum total of 100 files per card) has been reached. If the
maximum number of files is exceeded, format the current memory card or insert another
card; if the card is full, insert another card or delete unwanted files.
Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Wi-Fi > Network connection in the camera setup menu
(0 169).
• Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
Miscellaneous
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (0 15, 201).
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings
or when no memory card is inserted (0 12, 205, 248).
Technical Notes 255
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder and
monitor.
A
Warning Icons
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a warning or error message
can be displayed in the monitor by pressing the W (Q) button.
Indicator
Monitor
Lock lens aperture ring at
minimum aperture (largest f/number).
Viewfinder
Solution
B
(flashes)
Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture
(highest f-number).
Lens not attached
F/s
(flashes)
Before taking photos, rotate
the zoom ring to extend the
lens.
F
(flashes)
• Attach non-IX NIKKOR lens.
• If non-CPU lens is attached, select mode M.
A lens with a retractable lens barrel button is
attached with the lens barrel retracted. Press the
retractable lens barrel button and rotate the zoom
ring to extend the lens.
Shutter release disabled.
d/s
Turn camera off and recharge or replace battery.
Recharge battery.
(flashes)
This battery cannot be used.
d
Choose battery designated for
Use Nikon-approved battery.
(flashes)
use in this camera.
Initialization error. Turn
d/k Turn camera off, remove and replace battery, and
camera off and then on again. (flashes) then turn camera on again.
Battery level is low. Complete
End cleaning and turn camera off and recharge or
operation and turn camera off
—
replace battery.
immediately.
Clock not set
No SD card inserted
Memory card is locked.
Slide lock to “write” position.
This memory card cannot be
used. Card may be damaged.
Insert another card.
Not available if Eye-Fi card is
locked.
256 Technical Notes
—
S/s
(flashes)
(
(flashes)
Set camera clock.
Turn camera off and confirm that card is correctly
inserted.
Memory card is locked (write protected). Slide card
write-protect switch to “write” position.
• Use approved card.
• Format card. If problem persists, card may be
damaged. Contact Nikon-authorized service
representative.
• Error creating new folder. Delete files or insert
(/k
new memory card.
(flashes)
• Insert new memory card.
• Eye-Fi card is still emitting wireless signal after
Disable has been selected for Eye-Fi upload. To
terminate wireless transmission, turn the camera
off and remove the card.
(/k Eye-Fi card is locked (write protected). Slide card
(flashes) write-protect switch to “write” position.
0
227
226
87
14
2, 11
236
2, 11
244
15,
201
12
12
238
196
12,
146
12
204
12
Indicator
Monitor
This card is not formatted.
Format the card.
Card is full
—
Subject is too bright
Subject is too dark
No “Bulb” in S mode
No “Time” in S mode
No “Bulb” in HDR mode
No “Time” in HDR mode
Interval timer shooting
—
—
Viewfinder
Solution
T
Format card or turn camera off and insert new
(flashes) memory card.
• Reduce quality or size.
j/A/s
• Delete photographs.
(flashes)
• Insert new memory card.
●
Camera can not focus using autofocus. Change
(flashes) composition or focus manually.
• Use a lower ISO sensitivity.
• Use commercial ND filter.
• In mode:
S Increase shutter speed
A Choose a smaller aperture (higher f-number)
s
% Choose another shooting mode
(flashes)
• Use a higher ISO sensitivity.
• Use flash.
• In mode:
S Lower shutter speed
A Choose a larger aperture (lower f-number)
A
(flashes)
Change shutter speed or select mode M.
&
(flashes)
A
(flashes) • Change shutter speed.
• Turn HDR off.
&
(flashes)
Menus and playback are not available while interval
—
timer photography is in progress. Turn camera off.
Flash has fired at full power. Check photo in
N
monitor; if underexposed, adjust settings and try
(flashes)
again.
• Use the flash.
• Change distance to subject, aperture, flash range,
or ISO sensitivity.
• Lens focal length is less than 18 mm: use a longer
N/s
focal length.
(flashes) • Optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash unit attached:
flash is in bounce position or focus distance is
very short. Continue shooting; if necessary,
increase focus distance to prevent shadows from
appearing in photograph.
0
12,
196
59
146
12
21, 52,
57
67
236
85
86
3
67
62
85
86
85, 87
87, 88
96
68
—
62
66, 67,
86
—
—
Technical Notes 257
Indicator
Monitor
Flash error
Viewfinder
s
(flashes)
Error. Press shutter release
button again.
Start-up error. Contact a
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Metering error
Unable to start live view.
Please wait for camera to cool.
O
(flashes)
Solution
Error occurred updating firmware for optional flash
unit. Contact Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Release shutter. If error persists or appears
frequently, consult Nikon-authorized service
representative.
Consult Nikon-authorized service representative.
0
—
—
—
Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming 124,
live view or movie recording.
127
Folder selected for playback contains no images
(note that this message will be displayed if memory
card is inserted after Current is selected for
12,
Folder contains no images.
—
Playback folder in playback menu and playback
175
started before any pictures are taken). Insert
another memory card or select All for Playback
folder.
Cannot display this file.
—
File can not be played back on camera.
—
Images created with other devices can not be
Cannot select this file.
—
206
retouched.
Memory card does not contain NEF (RAW) images
No image for retouching.
—
213
for use with NEF (RAW) processing.
Could not connect; multiple
Multiple smart devices are attempting to connect to
devices detected. Try again
—
camera simultaneously. Wait a few minutes before 168
later.
trying again.
Select Disable for Wi-Fi > Network connection,
Error
—
172
then select Enable again.
Network access not available
Turn camera off and try again after waiting for
—
—
until camera cools.
camera to cool.
Check printer. To resume, select Continue (if
—*
Check printer.
—
available).
Paper is not selected size. Insert paper of correct
Check paper.
—
—*
size and select Continue.
Paper jam.
—
Clear jam and select Continue.
—*
Out of paper.
—
Insert paper of selected size and select Continue.
—*
Check ink supply.
—
Check ink. To resume, select Continue.
—*
Out of ink.
—
Replace ink and select Continue.
—*
* See printer manual for more information.
258 Technical Notes
—
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D5300 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount
Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)
Effective angle of view Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to approx. 1.5× that of lenses
with FX format angle of view
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
24.2 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor
Total pixels
24.78 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (optional
Capture NX 2 software required)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
• 6000 × 4000 (Large)
• 4496 × 3000 (Medium)
• 2992 × 2000 (Small)
File format
• NEF (RAW): 12- or 14 bit, compressed
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx.
1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16) compression
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and
JPEG formats
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape; selected
Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
Media
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards
File system
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF (Digital Print Order
Format), Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras)
2.3, PictBridge
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex viewfinder
Frame coverage
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical
Magnification
Approx. 0.82 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1)
Eyepoint
18 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment
–1.7–+1.0 m–1
Focusing screen
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen
Reflex mirror
Quick return
Lens aperture
Instant return, electronically controlled
Technical Notes 259
Lens
Compatible lenses
Autofocus is available with AF-S, AF-P, and AF-I lenses. Autofocus is not
available with other type G and D lenses, AF lenses (IX NIKKOR and lenses
for the F3AF are not supported), and AI-P lenses. Non-CPU lenses can be
used in mode M, but the camera exposure meter will not function.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a
maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Release
Release mode
Frame advance rate
Self-timer
Exposure
Metering mode
Metering method
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
Exposure meter
coupling
Mode
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter
1/4000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV; Bulb; Time
X= 1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower
8 (single frame), ! (continuous L), 9 (continuous H), J (quiet
shutter release), E (self-timer), " (delayed remote; ML-L3), # (quickresponse remote; ML-L3); interval timer photography supported
• !: Up to 3 fps
• 9: Up to 5 fps (JPEG and 12-bit NEF/RAW) or 4 fps (14-bit NEF/RAW)
Note: Frame rates assume continuous-servo AF, manual or shutterpriority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, Release
selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection), and other
settings at default values.
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures
TTL exposure metering using 2016-pixel RGB sensor
• Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II (type G, E, and D lenses);
color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses)
• Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to 8-mm circle in center
of frame
• Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2.5% of frame) centered on
selected focus point
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
CPU
Auto modes (i auto; j auto, flash off ); programmed auto with flexible
program (P); shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A); manual
(M); scene modes (k portrait; l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up; o night
portrait; r night landscape; s party/indoor; t beach/snow; u sunset; v dusk/dawn; w pet
portrait; x candlelight; y blossom; z autumn colors; 0 food); special effects modes
(% night vision; g color sketch; ' toy camera effect; ( miniature effect; 3 selective color;
1 silhouette; 2 high key; 3 low key; ) HDR painting)
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV in P, S, A, and
M modes
Bracketing
• Exposure bracketing: 3 shots in steps of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
• White balance bracketing: 3 shots in steps of 1
• Active D-Lighting bracketing: 2 shots
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value with A (L) button
260 Technical Notes
Exposure
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
Active D-Lighting
Focus
Autofocus
Detection range
Lens servo
Focus point
AF-area mode
Focus lock
ISO 100 – 12800 in steps of 1/3 EV. Can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or
1 EV (ISO 25600 equivalent) above ISO 12800; auto ISO sensitivity control
available
Y Auto, Z Extra high, P High, Q Normal, R Low, ! Off
Nikon Multi-CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase
detection, 39 focus points (including 9 cross-type sensor), and AF-assist
illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft 8 in.–9 ft 10 in.)
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-servo AF (AF-C); auto
AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A); predictive focus tracking activated
automatically according to subject status
• Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points
Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 39- point dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking, autoarea AF
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (singleservo AF) or by pressing A (L) button
Flash
Built-in flash
i, k, p, n, o, s, w, g, ' : Auto flash with auto pop-up
P, S, A, M, 0: Manual pop-up with button release
Guide Number
Approx. 12/39, 13/43 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
Flash control
TTL: i-TTL flash control using 2016-pixel RGB sensor is available with
built-in flash and SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, or
SB-300; i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix and
center-weighted metering, standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot
metering
Flash mode
Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync, auto slow sync with
red-eye reduction, fill-flash, red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync with
red-eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off
Flash compensation
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3 or 1/2 EV
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes
after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or
System (CLS)
SB-700 as a master flash or SU-800 as commander; Flash Color
Information Communication supported with all CLS-compatible flash
units
Sync terminal
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)
White balance
White balance
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash, cloudy,
shade, preset manual, all except preset manual with fine-tuning.
Technical Notes 261
Live view
Lens servo
AF-area mode
Autofocus
Automatic scene
selection
Movie
Metering
Metering method
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-servo AF (AF-F)
• Manual focus (MF)
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-tracking AF
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects focus point
automatically when face-priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)
Available in i and j modes
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor
Matrix
• 1920 × 1080, 60p (progressive)/50p/30p/25p/24p, ★ high/normal
• 1280 × 720, 60p/50p, ★ high/normal
• 640 × 424, 30p/25p, ★ high/normal
Frame rates of 30p (actual frame rate 29.97 fps) and 60p (actual frame
rate 59.94 fps) are available when NTSC is selected for video mode. 25p
and 50p are available when PAL is selected for video mode. Actual frame
rate when 24p is selected is 23.976 fps.
File format
MOV
Video compression
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device Built-in or external stereo microphone; sensitivity adjustable
ISO sensitivity
ISO 100–12800; can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 25600
equivalent) above ISO 12800
Monitor
Monitor
8.1 cm/3.2-in. (3 : 2), approx. 1037k-dot (720 × 480 × 3 = 1,036,800 dots),
vari-angle TFT monitor with 170 ° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame
coverage, and brightness adjustment
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 12, or 80 images or calendar) playback with
playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows,
histogram display, highlights, auto image rotation, picture rating, and
image comment (up to 36 characters)
Interface
USB
Hi-Speed USB
Video output
NTSC, PAL
HDMI output
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector
Accessory terminal
Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10 (available separately)
Remote cords: MC-DC2 (available separately)
GPS units: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)
Audio input
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter); supports optional ME-1 stereo
microphones
262 Technical Notes
Wireless
Standards
Communications
protocols
Operating frequency
Range (line of sight)
Data rate
Security
Wireless setup
Access protocols
Location data
Receiving frequency
Geodesics
Supported languages
Supported languages
Power source
Battery
AC adapter
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g
• IEEE 802.11b: DSSS/CCK
• IEEE 802.11g: OFDM
2412–2462 MHz (channels 1–11)
Approximately 30 m/98 ft (assumes no interference; range may vary with
signal strength and presence or absence of obstacles)
54 Mbps
Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE standard. Actual rates may
differ.
• Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
• Encryption: AES
Supports WPS
Infrastructure
1575.42 MHz (C/A code)
WGS84
Arabic, Bengali, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish,
Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian,
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,
Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian, Russian, Spanish, Swedish,
Tamil, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL14a battery
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power connector (available
separately)
Tripod socket
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Tripod socket
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 125 × 98 × 76 mm (4.9 × 3.9 × 3 in.)
Weight
Approx. 530 g (1 lb 2.7 oz) with battery and memory card but without
body cap; approx. 480 g/1 lb 0.9 oz (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Humidity
85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and Imaging
Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software
described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages
that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Technical Notes 263
❚❚ MH-24 Battery Charger
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum
DC 8.4 V/0.9 A
Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a
Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 °C/77 °F
when no charge remains
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.), excluding plug adapter
Weight
Approx. 96 g (3.4 oz), excluding plug adapter
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Charging time
❚❚ EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type
Rated capacity
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.2 V/1230 mAh
0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)
Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software
described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages
that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
264 Technical Notes
❚❚ Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF) is a standard widely
used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes
of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows
pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: The D5300 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital
Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which information stored with
photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output
on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and
printer industries, allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without
first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces
used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual
data and control signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
A
Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or
other countries and is used under license. Mac OS and OS X are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows
Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. PictBridge logo is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos
are trademarks of the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. All
other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with
your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
A
Conformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using the Conformity
marking option in the setup menu (0 204).
A
FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The FreeType Project
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
A
MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2013 The HarfBuzz Project
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.
Technical Notes 265
Lens Kits
The camera can be purchased as a kit with the lens listed below.
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR and
AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G
These retractable lenses are for use exclusively with DX format Nikon digital SLR
cameras; SLR film cameras and D4-series, D3-series, D2-series, D1-series, D800-series,
D700, D610, D600, D300-series, D200, D100, D90, D80, D70-series, D60, D50, D40series, D7000, D5100, D5000, D3200, D3100, D3000 digital SLR cameras are not
supported. The parts of the lens are listed below.
Focal length mark
Focal length scale
Lens mounting mark (0 13)
CPU contacts (0 227)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Retractable lens barrel button (0 14)
Focus ring (0 57, 125)
Zoom ring (0 20)
266 Technical Notes
❚❚ Focus
The focus mode can be selected using camera controls (0 51).
Autofocus
Focus is adjusted automatically when the camera is in autofocus mode (0 51). The
focus ring can also be used to focus the camera if the shutter-release button is kept
pressed halfway (or if the AF-ON button is kept pressed); this is known as “autofocus
with manual override” (M/A). Autofocus will resume when the shutter-release button
is pressed halfway (or the AF-ON button is pressed) a second time. Note that
touching the focus ring while autofocus is in effect will change the focus position.
Manual Focus
When the camera is in manual focus mode, focus can be adjusted by rotating the lens
focus ring (0 57). When the camera is off or the standby timer has expired, the focus
ring can not be used to focus and rotating the zoom ring will change the focus
position; before focusing, turn the camera on or press the shutter-release button to
reactivate the standby timer.
Users of D810-series, Df, D750, D7200, D7100, and D5200 cameras should note that if
the standby timer is allowed to expire, the focus position will change when the timer
is restarted. Refocus before shooting. Longer standby times are recommended for
manual focus and in other situations in which you may not release the shutter
immediately after focusing.
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft)
and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the
lens obscures the built-in flash).
Shadow
Vignetting
Camera
Zoom position
Minimum distance without vignetting
D5500/D5300/D5200/D3300
18 mm
24, 35, 45, and 55 mm
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
Technical Notes 267
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR, AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR Only)
When an AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR is mounted on the camera,
vibration reduction can be enabled or disabled using the Optical VR option in the
shooting menu (0 181). If On is selected, vibration reduction will take effect
whenever the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Vibration reduction reduces
blur caused by camera shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than
would otherwise be the case, increasing the range of shutter speeds available. The
effects of VR on shutter speed are measured according to Camera and Imaging
Products Association (CIPA) standards; FX-format lenses are measured using FXformat digital cameras, DX-format lenses using DX-format cameras. Zoom lenses are
measured at maximum zoom.
D
Vibration Reduction
• When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button halfway and wait for the
image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down.
• When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the
shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of
the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be
applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a
wide arc.
• If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while
the flash charges.
• Vibration reduction is generally recommended when the camera is mounted on a tripod,
although you may prefer to turn it off depending on shooting conditions and the type of
tripod.
268 Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• 55 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-55A
• Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•
•
•
•
55 mm screw-on filters
Rear Lens Cap LF-4
Lens Case CL-0815
Bayonet Hood HB-N106
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as
shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with
the lens hood lock mark (—{).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and avoid
gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The
hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
Technical Notes 269
❚❚ Specifications
Type
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Distance information
Zoom
Focusing
Vibration reduction
(AF-P DX NIKKOR
18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G
VR only)
Minimum focus distance
Diaphragm blades
Diaphragm
Aperture range
Metering
Filter-attachment size
Dimensions
Weight
270 Technical Notes
Type G AF-P DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount
18–55 mm
f/3.5–5.6
12 elements in 9 groups (2 aspherical lens elements)
76° – 28° 50´
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)
Output to camera
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Autofocus controlled by stepping motor; separate focus ring for manual
focus
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
0.25 m (0.9 ft) from focal plane (0 58) at all zoom positions
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Fully automatic
• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the
exposure increment selected with the camera.
Full aperture
55 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Approx. 64.5 mm maximum diameter × 62.5 mm (distance from camera
lens mount flange)
• AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR: Approx. 205 g (7.3 oz)
• AF-P DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G: Approx. 195 g (6.9 oz)
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II is a retractable lens for use exclusively
with DX format Nikon digital SLR cameras. The parts of the lens are listed below.
Focal length mark
Lens mounting mark (0 13)
Focal length scale
Retractable lens barrel button (0 14)
CPU contacts (0 227)
Rear lens cap
Lens cap
Focus ring (0 57, 125)
A-M mode switch (0 18, 57)
Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (0 272)
Zoom ring (0 20)
❚❚ Focus
Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the position of the lens
A-M mode switch (0 51, 57).
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft)
and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the
lens obscures the built-in flash).
Shadow
Vignetting
Technical Notes 271
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the vibration reduction
switch to ON and takes effect whenever the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera
shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than would
otherwise be the case (as measured at 55 mm with a DX-format camera according to
Camera and Imaging Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the
photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the range of shutter speeds
available.
D
Vibration Reduction
• When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button halfway and wait for the
image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down.
• When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the
shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of
the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be
applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a
wide arc.
• Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect.
• If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while
the flash charges.
• Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or
the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which case ON is recommended.
272 Technical Notes
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• 52 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52
• Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•
•
•
•
52 mm screw-on filters
Rear Lens Cap LF-4
Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0815
Bayonet Hood HB-69
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as
shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with
the lens hood lock mark (—{).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and
avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly
attached. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
Technical Notes 273
❚❚ Specifications
Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount
18–55 mm
f/3.5–5.6
11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical lens element)
76 °–28 ° 50 ´
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)
Output to camera
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for
manual focus
Vibration reduction
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance • AF: 0.28 m (0.92 ft) from focal plane (0 58) at all zoom positions
• MF: 0.25 m (0.82 ft) from focal plane at all zoom positions
Diaphragm blades
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm
Fully automatic
Aperture range
• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 55 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the
exposure increment selected with the camera.
Metering
Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 52 mm (P=0.75 mm)
Dimensions
Approx. 66 mm diameter × 59.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount
flange when lens is retracted)
Weight
Approx. 195 g (6.9 oz)
Type
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Angle of view
Focal length scale
Distance information
Zoom
Focusing
274 Technical Notes
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR, for use exclusively with DX format
Nikon digital SLR cameras, is the lens generally used in this manual for illustrative
purposes. The parts of the lens are listed below.
Focal length mark
Focal length scale
Lens cap
Lens mounting mark (0 13)
CPU contacts (0 227)
Rear lens cap
Zoom ring (0 20)
A-M mode switch (0 18, 57)
Vibration reduction ON/OFF switch (0 276)
Focus ring (0 57, 125)
❚❚ Focus
Focus mode is determined by the camera focus mode and the position of the lens
A-M mode switch (0 51, 57).
A
Focusing with AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR Lenses
When single-servo AF (AF-S) is selected as the camera focus mode and the lens A-M switch is
set to A, focus can be adjusted by keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway after
the autofocus operation is complete and manually rotating the focus ring. To refocus using
autofocus, press the shutter-release button halfway again.
Technical Notes 275
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft)
and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting (shadows created where the end of the
lens obscures the built-in flash).
Shadow
Vignetting
Camera
Zoom position
Minimum distance without vignetting
D7100/D7000/D300 series/
D200/D100
18 mm
24–140 mm
18 mm
24 mm
35–140 mm
18 mm
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
D90/D80/D50
D5500/D5300/D5200/D5100/D5000/
D3300/D3200/D3100/D3000/
D70 series/D60/D40 series
24 mm
35–140 mm
1.0 m/3 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Vibration reduction can be enabled by sliding the vibration reduction
switch to ON and takes effect whenever the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. Vibration reduction reduces blur caused by camera
shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than would
otherwise be the case (as measured at 140 mm with a D300s camera according to
Camera and Imaging Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with the
photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the range of shutter speeds
available.
276 Technical Notes
D
Vibration Reduction
• When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button halfway and wait for the
image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of
the way down.
• When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the
shutter is released. This does not indicate a malfunction.
• When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of
the pan (if the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be
applied only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a
wide arc.
• Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If
power to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken.
This is not a malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the
camera on.
• If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while
the flash charges.
• Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod head is unsecured or
the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which case ON is recommended.
Technical Notes 277
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• 67 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-67
• Rear Lens Cap
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
•
•
•
•
67 mm screw-on filters
Rear Lens Cap LF-4
Flexible Lens Pouch CL-1018
Bayonet Hood HB-32
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood alignment mark ( ) as
shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until the ● mark is aligned with
the lens hood lock mark (—{).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its base and
avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly
attached. The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
278 Technical Notes
❚❚ Specifications
Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F mount
18–140 mm
f/3.5–5.6
17 elements in 12 groups (including 1 ED lens element, 1 aspherical lens
element)
Angle of view
76° – 11° 30 ´
Focal length scale
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 50, 70, 140)
Distance information Output to camera
Zoom
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent
Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane (0 58) at all zoom positions
Diaphragm blades
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm
Fully automatic
Aperture range
• 18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22
• 140 mm focal length: f/5.6–38
The minimum aperture displayed may vary depending on the size of the
exposure increment selected with the camera.
Metering
Full aperture
Filter-attachment size 67 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions
Approx. 78 mm maximum diameter × 97 mm (distance from camera lens
mount flange)
Weight
Approx. 490 g (17.3 oz)
Type
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
Technical Notes 279
D
Lens Care
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and
fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth
or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking
care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens.
• The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element.
• Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch.
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the
hood.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent
mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
• Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from
reinforced plastic.
A
A Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses
Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those shown below.
1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the main subject:
If the focus point contains both foreground and background
objects, the camera may focus on the background and the
subject may be out of focus.
Example: A far-off portrait
subject at some distance
from the background
2 The subject contains many fine details.
The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects that lack
contrast or appear smaller than objects in the background.
Example: A field of flowers
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on another subject at
the same distance and then recompose the photograph. For more information, see
“Getting Good Results with Autofocus” (0 52).
280 Technical Notes
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on
a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I card at different image quality and size
settings.
Image quality
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
Image size
File size 1
No. of images 1
Buffer capacity 2
—
23.8 MB
437
6
—
19.0 MB
524
13
Large
12.0 MB
1000
100
Medium
7.4 MB
1700
100
Small
3.8 MB
3300
100
Large
6.3 MB
2000
100
JPEG normal
Medium
3.8 MB
3300
100
Small
2.0 MB
6300
100
Large
2.7 MB
3900
100
JPEG basic
Medium
1.9 MB
6500
100
Small
1.0 MB
12,100
100
1 All figures are approximate. Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops when long
exposure noise reduction (0 179), auto distortion control (0 179), or Print date (0 190) is on.
JPEG fine
Technical Notes 281
Battery Life
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with fully-charged
batteries varies with the condition of the battery, temperature, the interval between
shots, and the length of time menus are displayed. Sample figures for EN-EL14a
(1230 mAh) batteries are given below.
• Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1): Approximately 600 shots
• Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 2): Approximately 2000 shots
• Movies: Approximately 50 minutes at 1080/60p and 1080/50p 3
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm
f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every
30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is turned on for 4 s; tester waits for
standby timer to expire after monitor is turned off; flash fired at full power once
every other shot. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens
under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, continuous highspeed release mode, focus mode set to AF-C, image quality set to JPEG basic,
image size set to M (medium), white balance set to v, ISO sensitivity set to
ISO 100, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three
times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are
then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off;
cycle repeated once standby timer has expired.
3 Measured at 23°C/73.4°F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and
an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under conditions specified by
the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be
up to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size; recording may end before these limits
are reached if the camera temperature rises.
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using the built-in Wi-Fi or location data functions, or using an optional location
data unit
• Using an Eye-Fi card
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
• Repeatedly zooming in and out with an AF-P lens.
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL14a batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left
unused.
282 Technical Notes
Index
Symbols
i (Auto mode) ........................... 3, 19
j (Auto (flash off) mode) ....... 3, 19
k (Portrait) ................................... 3, 31
l (Landscape)............................. 3, 31
p (Child)........................................ 3, 31
m (Sports) ..................................... 3, 32
n (Close up) ................................. 3, 32
h (Scene)............................... 3, 33
o (Night portrait)............................33
r (Night landscape) ......................33
s (Party/indoor)..............................34
t (Beach/snow)...............................34
u (Sunset)..........................................34
v (Dusk/dawn) ................................35
w (Pet portrait) ................................35
x (Candlelight)..................................35
y (Blossom).......................................36
z (Autumn colors)..........................36
0 (Food) ..............................................36
q (Special effects) .............. 3, 37
% (Night vision) .......................... 3, 37
g (Color sketch) .................. 3, 38, 41
' (Toy camera effect) ........ 3, 38, 42
( (Miniature effect) ...........3, 38, 42
3 (Selective color).............. 3, 39, 43
1 (Silhouette).............................. 3, 39
2 (High key)................................. 3, 39
3 (Low key).................................. 3, 40
) (HDR painting)........................ 3, 40
P (Programmed auto) ........ 3, 82, 84
S (Shutter-priority auto) .... 3, 82, 85
A (Aperture-priority auto) 3, 82, 86
M (Manual) ............................. 3, 82, 87
U (flexible program) .......................84
8 (Single frame) .............................45
! (Continuous L) ..................45, 46
9 (Continuous H)..................45, 46
E (Self-timer).............................45, 49
" (Delayed remote (ML-L3))....45,
70
# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3))
45, 70
J (Quiet shutter release)......45, 48
c (Single-point AF) ......................53
d (Dynamic-area AF)...................53
e (Auto-area AF) ...........................53
f (3D-tracking).......................53, 54
6 (Face-priority AF) ...........120, 121
7 (Wide-area AF) ................120, 121
8 (Normal-area AF)............120, 121
9 (Subject-tracking AF) .120, 121
L (Matrix metering).......................90
M (Center-weighted metering)..90
N (Spot metering) ......................... 90
o (auto flash) ........................... 63
j (red-eye reduction)..........63, 65
p (slow sync).....................63, 65
q (rear-curtain sync)............. 65
Y (Flash compensation) ............ 93
E (Exposure compensation)...... 92
e (AE bracketing) ................ 108
f (WB bracketing) .............. 108
g (ADL bracketing) ..................... 108
d (Help)................................................8
m (White balance) ...................... 101
L (Preset manual) ..................... 104
3 (“Beep” indicator)..................... 187
I (focus indicator) ....21, 55, 57, 91
N (flash-ready indicator).4, 23, 235
a (live view)...........24, 27, 118, 126
P button ......................................7, 135
t (Memory buffer)................ 47, 281
Aperture ...............................83, 86, 87
Aperture-priority auto ................. 86
Assign AE-L/AF-L button ...........194
Assign Fn button .......................... 193
Auto (White balance).................. 101
Auto bracketing...................108, 192
Auto distortion control .............. 179
Auto flash.......................................... 63
Auto image rotation.................... 202
Auto info display .......................... 199
Auto ISO sensitivity control...... 181
Auto off timers .............................. 186
Auto-area AF (AF-area mode).... 53
Autoexposure lock ........................ 91
Autofocus................51–56, 119–121
Auto-servo AF ................................. 51
Available settings......................... 248
Numerics
Battery..............................11, 236, 264
Beep.................................................. 187
Black-and-white............................ 208
Blue intensifier (Filter effects) .. 209
Body cap..................................... 1, 237
Border (PictBridge) ...................... 157
Bracketing..............................108, 192
Built-in AF-assist illuminator ..... 52,
185, 229
Built-in flash ............................ 62, 230
Bulb..................................................... 88
Burst............................................. 46, 99
2016-pixel RGB sensor......192, 227,
260, 261
3D color matrix metering.......... 227
3D-tracking (AF-area mode) 53, 54
A
A/V cable......................................... 164
AC adapter.............................236, 239
Access lamp ..................................... 21
Accessories..................................... 236
Accessory terminal accessories......
237
Active D-Lighting........................... 94
Add items (My Menu)................. 223
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing
set)................................................... 108
Adobe RGB ..................................... 179
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing
set)................................................... 108
AE lock................................................ 91
AE-L ..................................................... 91
AE-L/AF-L button ............... 56, 91, 194
AF...............................51–56, 119–121
AF area brackets .......................16, 20
AF-A .................................................... 51
AF-area mode.........................53, 120
AF-assist........................................... 185
AF-assist illuminator ............ 52, 229
AF-C ........................................... 51, 184
AF-F................................................... 119
AF-S............................................ 51, 119
A-GPS data........................................ 80
A-M mode switch.........57, 271, 275
Angle of view................................. 231
B
C
Calendar playback ....................... 141
Camera Control Pro 2 ................. 236
Capture NX 2.................................. 236
CEC .................................................... 166
Center-weighted metering......... 90
Charger ............................11, 236, 264
Choose start/end point.............. 131
Clean image sensor..................... 241
Clock .......................................... 15, 201
Clock battery ................................... 18
Cloudy (White balance) ............. 101
CLS..................................................... 232
Color balance................................. 210
Color outline .................................. 216
Color sketch ............................ 41, 216
Color space..................................... 179
Color temperature ....................... 102
Compatible lenses ....................... 226
Conformity marking...........204, 265
Continuous (Release mode) 45, 46
Continuous-servo AF........... 51, 184
CPU contacts ................................. 227
Technical Notes 283
CPU lens...........................................226
Create log.......................................... 76
Creative Lighting System ..........232
Cross screen (Filter effects) .......209
Custom Settings ...........................182
Cyanotype.......................................208
D
Date and time.........................15, 201
Date counter ..................................190
Date format .............................15, 201
Daylight saving time............15, 201
DCF version 2.0 .............................265
Delayed remote (ML-L3) ....... 45, 70
Delete ...............................................146
Delete all images..........................147
Delete current image..................146
Delete log ......................................... 78
Delete selected images..............147
Device control (HDMI)................166
Digital Print Order Format .......159,
162, 265
Diopter adjustment control ...... 16,
236
Direct sunlight (White balance) .....
101
Distortion control.........................215
D-Lighting.......................................207
DPOF..............................159, 162, 265
DPOF print order ..........................162
Dynamic-area AF............................ 53
E
Edit movie............................. 131, 134
Electronic rangefinder.........57, 185
EV steps for exposure cntrl .......186
Exif version 2.3 ..............................265
Exposure....................... 83, 90, 91, 92
Exposure bracketing ...................108
Exposure compensation.............. 92
Exposure delay mode.................189
Exposure indicator................87, 122
Exposure lock .................................. 91
Exposure meters............................. 23
Exposure mode............................... 82
External microphone ........ 129, 237
Eye-Fi upload .................................204
F
Face-priority AF ............................120
File information ............................136
File number sequence................188
Filter effects.................113, 114, 209
Filters ................................................236
Fine-tuning white balance........103
Firmware version..........................204
Fisheye .............................................216
284 Technical Notes
Flash....................................23, 62, 232
Flash (White balance) .................101
Flash cntrl for built-in flash .......192
Flash compensation...................... 93
Flash control...................................192
Flash mode ................................ 63, 65
Flash range ....................................... 66
Flash ready indicator....... 4, 23, 235
Flash sync speed....................66, 260
Flexible program ............................ 84
Flicker reduction................. 127, 200
Fluorescent (White balance) ...101,
102
Fn button .........................................193
f-number .................................... 83, 86
Focal length....................................231
Focal length scale......266, 271, 275
Focal plane mark ............................ 58
Focus............... 51–58, 119–121, 125
Focus indicator........... 21, 55, 57, 91
Focus lock ......................................... 55
Focus mode.............................51, 119
Focus point21, 53, 55, 57, 120, 121,
184
Focusing screen............................259
Focusing the viewfinder .............. 16
Focus-mode switch ................ 18, 57
Format..............................................196
Format memory card...........17, 196
Frame interval (Slide show) ......150
Frame size/frame rate.................128
Framing grid ........................ 123, 188
Front-curtain sync.......................... 65
Full-frame playback.....................135
Full-time-servo AF........................119
Image Dust Off ref photo ..........199
Image overlay................................211
Image quality................................... 59
Image review .................................176
Image size ......................................... 61
Incandescent (White balance).101
Info display format.......................197
In-focus indicator ...... 21, 55, 57, 91
Information display ................ 6, 197
Infrared receiver ............................. 70
Interval timer shooting ................ 68
ISO display ......................................188
ISO sensitivity .........................67, 180
i-TTL...................................................192
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital
SLR ...................................................192
J
JPEG .................................................... 59
JPEG basic ......................................... 59
JPEG fine............................................ 59
JPEG normal..................................... 59
L
GPS options...................................... 79
Green intensifier (Filter effects) ......
209
Landscape (Set Picture Control).....
111
Language .................................15, 201
Large (Image size) .......................... 61
Lens ............... 13, 226, 266, 271, 275
Lens focus ring ....57, 266, 271, 275
Lens mount ..................................1, 58
Lens vibration reduction switch.....
18, 271, 272, 275, 276
Live view.................. 24, 27, 118, 126
Location data..........xv, 74, 139, 237
Location data unit.................81, 237
Lock mirror up for cleaning ......243
Log list................................................ 78
Long exposure NR........................179
Low-angle shots ................................5
H
M
H.264.................................................262
HDMI....................................... 165, 265
HDMI-CEC .......................................166
HDR (high dynamic range) ......... 96
Help........................................................8
Hi (Sensitivity) ................................. 67
High definition.................... 165, 265
High Dynamic Range (HDR) ....... 96
High ISO NR....................................180
High-angle shots...............................5
Highlights ............................. 136, 176
Histogram ....................137, 176, 210
Manage Picture Control.............115
Manual ........................................ 57, 87
Manual focus ................ 57, 119, 125
Manual movie settings...............129
Matrix metering.............................. 90
Maximum aperture ..............57, 226
Maximum sensitivity...................180
Medium (Image size) .................... 61
Memory buffer ................................ 47
Memory card .......12, 196, 238, 281
Memory card capacity................281
Metering............................................ 90
Microphone....................................128
Miniature effect .....................42, 218
Minimum shutter speed............180
G
I
Image comment ...........................202
Mirror............................................1, 243
Mode dial .............................................3
Monitor.....................5, 118, 135, 196
Monitor brightness...................... 196
Monochrome................................. 208
Monochrome (Set Picture Control)
111
Mounting mark... 13, 266, 271, 275
MOV .................................................. 189
Movie quality................................. 128
Movie settings............................... 128
Movie-record button ........... 28, 126
Movies....................................... 27, 126
Multiple exposure...........................98
My Menu ......................................... 223
N
NEF (RAW).......................59, 178, 213
NEF (RAW) processing................ 213
NEF (RAW) recording .................. 178
Network connection................... 169
Neutral (Set Picture Control).... 111
Nikon Transfer 2............................ 153
Non-CPU lens ................................ 228
Normal-area AF............................. 120
Number of focus points............. 184
Number of shots........................... 282
O
Optional flash.......................192, 232
Output resolution (HDMI)......... 166
Overview data............................... 139
P
Page size (PictBridge) ................. 157
Perspective control...................... 217
Photo information ..............136, 176
PictBridge ..............................156, 265
Picture Controls ...................111, 112
PIN-entry WPS............................... 170
Playback .......................................... 135
Playback display options........... 176
Playback folder ............................. 175
Playback information ........136, 176
Playback menu.............................. 175
Playback zoom.............................. 142
Portrait (Set Picture Control).... 111
Power connector.................236, 239
Power switch ......................................2
Preset manual (White balance) ......
101, 104
Press the shutter-release button
all the way down ...........................21
Press the shutter-release button
halfway..............................................21
Print (DPOF) ..........................159, 163
Print date......................................... 190
Print select...................................... 159
Printing ............................................ 156
Programmed auto ......................... 84
Protecting photographs............ 143
Push-button WPS......................... 169
Q
Quick retouch................................215
Quick-response remote (ML-L3)45,
70
Quiet shutter release ..............45, 48
R
Rangefinder ................................... 185
Rank items (My Menu) ............... 225
Rating ......................................144, 150
Rear-curtain sync ........................... 65
Recent settings ............................. 222
Record location data..................... 74
Red intensifier (Filter effects) ... 209
Red-eye correction ...................... 207
Red-eye reduction ...................63, 65
Release mode .................................. 45
Remote control...................... 70, 237
Remote cord ..................88, 203, 237
Remote on duration (ML-L3).... 187
Remote shutter release.............. 203
Remove items (My Menu)......... 224
Reset .................................72, 177, 183
Reset custom settings ................ 183
Reset shooting menu ................. 177
Resize................................................ 214
Retouch menu............................... 205
Retractable lens barrel button . 14,
18
Reverse dial rotation................... 194
Reverse indicators........................ 194
RGB...........................................137, 179
RGB Histogram.............................. 137
Rotate tall........................................ 176
S
Save selected frame .................... 134
Scene auto selector....................... 25
Scene mode ..................................... 30
Select to send to smart device 173
Selective color........................ 43, 219
Self-portrait.........................................5
Self-timer .......................... 45, 49, 187
Sensitivity ................................ 67, 180
Sepia ................................................. 208
Set clock from satellite................. 79
Set Picture Control....................... 112
Setup menu ................................... 195
Shade (White balance)............... 101
Shooting data................................138
Shooting menu............................. 177
Shutter-priority auto..................... 85
Shutter-release button...21, 55, 91,
186
Shutter-release button AE-L..... 186
Side-by-side comparison .......... 221
Single frame (Release mode)..... 45
Single-point AF (AF-area mode)53
Single-servo AF...................... 51, 119
Size ............................................. 61, 128
Skylight (Filter effects)................ 209
Slide show....................................... 149
Slot empty release lock.............. 194
Slow sync ................................... 63, 65
Small (Image size) .......................... 61
Soft (Filter effects)........................209
Special effects mode..................... 37
Speedlight ...................................... 232
Spot metering ................................. 90
sRGB.................................................. 179
SSID ................................................... 171
Standard (Set Picture Control). 111
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital
SLR ................................................... 192
Standby timer......................... 23, 186
Start printing (PictBridge)158, 161
Storage folder................................ 178
Straighten ....................................... 215
Subject-tracking AF..................... 120
T
Television ........................................ 164
Thumbnail playback ................... 140
Time .................................................... 88
Time stamp (PictBridge) ............ 157
Time zone ................................ 15, 201
Time zone and date..................... 201
Timer............................................ 49, 68
Toning .....................................113, 114
Trim ................................................... 208
Trimming movies ......................... 131
Type D lens ..................................... 227
Type E lens...................................... 227
Type G lens ..................................... 227
U
Update A-GPS data........................ 80
USB cable ...............................153, 156
UTC............................................. 74, 139
V
Vibration reduction ....18, 268, 272,
276
Video mode...........................164, 202
View SSID ........................................ 171
Viewfinder ...........................4, 16, 259
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ............. 50
Viewfinder grid display .............. 188
Technical Notes 285
ViewNX 2 ............................... 151, 153
Vivid (Set Picture Control).........111
Volume................................... 130, 149
W
Warm filter (Filter effects)..........209
WB......................................................101
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing
set) ...................................................108
White balance................................101
Wide-area AF .................................120
Wi-Fi .......................................... xvi, 167
Wind noise reduction .................128
Wireless.................................... xvi, 167
Wireless Mobile Utility...... 167, 168
Wireless remote controller71, 203,
237
286 Technical Notes
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation
in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON
CORPORATION.
SB8K04(11)
6MB21711-04
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising